chapter 1 general chapter 1 general article 90

NEC SIGNIFICANT CHANGE COMPARISON STUDY

1

Amended NEC- 2011 NEC-2014 NEC-2017

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Chapter 1 General

ARTICLE 90 INTRODUCTION

90.1 Purpose: Add- (A) This Code is not

intended as a design specification or an

instruction manual for untrained persons.

90.8 (B) Number of Circuits in Enclosures.

Limiting the number of circuits in a single

enclosure minimizes the effects from a short

circuit or ground fault.

ARTICLE 100 DEFINITIONS ARTICLE 100 Definitions

Adjustable Speed Drive. New definitions.

Adjustable Speed Drive System. New

definitions.

Associated Apparatus [as applied to Hazardous

(Classified) Locations]. New definition.

Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring [as applied

to Hazardous (Classified) Locations]. New

definition.

Cable Routing Assemblies. A single channel or

connected multiple channels, as well as

associated fittings, forming a structural system

that is used to support and route communications

wires and cables associated with information

technology and communications equipment, Class


2


2, Class 3, and Type PLTC cables, and power-

limited fire alarm cables in plenums, risers, and

general-purpose applications. (CMP-16)

Battery System. New definitions.

Cable Rating Assembly. New definitions.

Charge Controller. New definitions.

Combustible Dust [as applied to Hazardous


Combustible Gas Detection System [as applied to

Hazardous (Classified) Locations]. New definition.

Communications Raceway. New definitions.

Control Circuit. New definitions.

Control Drawing (Classified) Locations]. New

definition.

Coordination (Selective). Localization of an

overcurrent

condition to restrict outages to the circuit or

equipment

affected, accomplished by the choice

selection and installation of overcurrent

protective devices and their ratings or

settings, for the full range of available

overcurrents, from overload to the


3


maximum available fault current, and for the

full range of overcurrent protective device

opening time associated with those

overcurrents.

Device. A unit of an electrical system, other

than a conductor, that carries or controls

electric energy as its principal function.

Dust-IgnitionProof [as applied to Hazardous


Dusttight [as applied to Hazardous (Classified)

Locations]. New definition.

Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. New

definitions.

Electric-Discharge Lighting. New definitions.

Electronically Actuated Fuse. New

definitions.

Ground-Fault Current Path. New definitions.

Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC).

The conductive path(s) that provides a

ground-fault current path and connects

installed to connect normally non–current-

carrying metal parts of equipment together

and to the system grounded conductor or to

the grounding electrode conductor, or both.


4


Informational Note No. 1: It is recognized

that the equipment grounding conductor

also performs bonding.

Informational Note No. 2: See 250.118 for a

list of acceptable equipment grounding

conductors.

Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor.

New definitions.

Hermatically Sealed [as applied to Hazardous


Industrial Control Panel. New definitions.

Information Technology Equipment (ITE) New

definition.

Innerduct. New definition.

Intrinsically Safe Apparatus. New definition.

Lighting Track (Track Lighting). New

definitions.

Nonincendive Circuit [as applied to Hazardous


Nonincendive Component [as applied to



5


Nonincendive Equipment [as applied to


Nonincendive Field Wiring [as applied to


Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus [as applied

to Hazardous (Classified) Locations]. New

definition.

Photovoltaic (PV) System. New definitions.

Retrofit Kit. New definitions.

Separately Derived System. A premises

wiring system whose power is derived from a

source of electric energy or equipment other

than a service. Such systems have no direct

connection from circuit conductors of one

system to circuit conductors of another

system, other than connections through the

earth, metal enclosures, metallic raceways,

or equipment grounding conductors.

Substation. New definitions.

Switchgear. New definitions.

ARTICLE 110 Requirements for Electrical

Installations


6


110.9 Interrupting Rating. Equipment

intended to interrupt current at fault levels

shall have an interrupting rating not less

than the at nominal circuit voltage and

sufficient for the current that is available at

the line terminals of the equipment.

Equipment intended to interrupt current at

other than fault levels shall have an

interrupting rating at nominal circuit voltage

not less than sufficient for the current that

must be interrupted.

110.9 Interrupting Rating. Equipment intended to

interrupt current at fault levels shall have an

interrupting rating the at nominal circuit voltage

at least equal to sufficient for the current that is

available at the line terminals of the equipment.

Equipment intended to interrupt current at other

than fault levels shall have an interrupting rating

at nominal circuit voltage at least equal to

sufficient for the current that must be

interrupted.

110.14 Electrical Connections.

(D) Installation. New section.

110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. Electrical

equipment,

such as switchboards, switchgear,

panelboards, industrial control panels, meter

socket enclosures, and motor control

centers, that are in other than dwelling units,

and are likely to require examination,

adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while

energized shall be field or factory marked to

warn qualified persons of potential electric

arc flash hazards. The marking shall meet the

requirements in 110.21(B) and shall be

located so as to be clearly visible to qualified

110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning.

(A) General. Electrical equipment, such as

switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, industrial

control panels, meter socket enclosures, and

motor control centers, that are in other than

dwelling units, and are likely to require

examination, adjustment, servicing, or

maintenance while energized shall be field or

factory marked to warn qualified persons of

potential electric arc flash hazards. The marking

shall meet the requirements in 110.21(B) and

shall be located so as to be clearly visible to

qualified persons before examination,


7


persons before examination, adjustment,

servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.

adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the

equipment.

(B) Service Equipment. New subsection.

110.21 Marking.

(A) Manufacturer’s Markings. The

manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other

descriptive marking by which the

organization responsible for the product can

be identified shall be placed on all electrical

equipment. Other markings that indicate

voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings

shall be provided as specified elsewhere in

this Code. The marking or label shall be of

sufficient durability to withstand the

environment involved.

(B) Field-Applied Hazard Marking. Where

caution warning, or danger signs or labels

are required by this Code, the labels shall

meet the following requirements:

(1) The marking shall adequately warn of the

hazard using effective words and/or colors

and/or symbols.

Informational Note: ANSI Z535.4-2011,

Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides

guidelines for suitable font sizes, words,

colors, symbols, and location requirements

for labels.

110.21 Marking.

(A) Manufacturer’s Markings. The manufacturer’s

name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by

which the organization responsible for the

product can be identified shall be placed on all

electrical equipment. Other markings that

indicate voltage, current, wattage, or other

ratings shall be provided as specified elsewhere in

this Code. The marking or label shall be of

sufficient durability to withstand the environment

involved.

(B) Field-Applied Hazard Marking. Where caution

warning, or danger signs or labels are required by

this Code, the labels shall meet the following

requirements:

(1) The marking shall adequately warn of the

hazard using effective words and/or colors and/or

symbols.

Informational Note: ANSI Z535.4-2011, Product

Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for

suitable font sizes, words, colors, symbols, and

location requirements for labels.


8


(2) The label shall be permanently affixed to

the equipment or wiring method and shall

not be hand written.

Exception to (2): Portions of labels or

markings that are variable, or that could be

subject to changes, shall be permitted to be

hand written and shall be legible.

(3) The label shall be of sufficient durability

to withstand the environment involved.

Informational Note: ANSI Z535.4-2011,

Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides

guidelines for the design and durability of

safety signs and labels for application to

electrical equipment.

(2) The label shall be permanently affixed to the

equipment or wiring method and shall not be

hand written.

Exception to (2): Portions of labels or markings

that are variable, or that could be subject to

changes, shall be permitted to be hand written

and shall be legible.

(3) The label shall be of sufficient durability to

withstand the environment involved.

Informational Note: ANSI Z535.4-2011, Product

Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for

the design and durability of safety signs and labels

for application to electrical equipment.

110.25. New section.

110.26 Spaces About Electrical Equipment:

(C)(3) Personnel Doors. Where equipment

rated 1200 800 A or more that contains

overcurrent devices, switching devices, or

control devices is installed and there is a

personnel door(s) intended for entrance to

and egress from the working space less than

7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest edge of the

working space, the door(s) shall open in the

direction of egress and be equipped with

listed panic hardware panic bars, pressure

110.26 Spaces About Electrical Equipment.

(A) Working Space. Working space for equipment

operating at 600 1000 volts, nominal, or less to

ground and likely to require examination,

adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while

energized shall comply with the dimensions of

110.26(A)(1), (A)(2), and (A)(3), and (A)(4) or as

required or permitted elsewhere in this Code.

(3) Height of Working Space. Add-


9


plates, or other devices that are normally

latched but open under simple pressure.

(E)(2) Outdoor. Outdoor installations shall

comply with 110.26(E)(2)(a) and (b).

(a) Installation Requirements: Outdoor

electrical equipment shall be installed in

suitable enclosures and shall be protected

from accidental contact by unauthorized

personnel, or by vehicular traffic, or by

accidental spillage or leakage from piping

systems. The working clearance space shall

include the zone described in 110.26(A). No

architectural appurtenance or other

equipment shall be located in this zone.

(b) Dedicated Equipment Space. The space

equal to the width and depth of the

equipment, and extending from grade to a

height of 1.8 m (6 ft) above the equipment,

shall be dedicated to the electrical

installation. No piping or other equipment

foreign to the electrical installation shall be

located in this zone.

Exception No. 3: On battery systems mounted on

open racks, the top clearance shall comply with

480.10(D).

(4) Limited Access. New section.

(5) Separation from High Voltage Equipment.

New section.

(E)(2) Outdoor. Outdoor installations shall comply

with 110.26(E)(2) (a) and (b) through (c).

(a) Installation Requirements: Outdoor electrical

equipment shall be the following:

(1) Installed in identified enclosures

(2) Protected from accidental contact by

unauthorized personnel or by vehicular traffic.

(3) Protected from accidental spillage or leakage

from piping systems.

(b) Working Space. Outdoor electrical equipment

shall be installed in suitable enclosures and shall

be protected from accidental contact by

unauthorized personnel, or by vehicular traffic, or

by accidental spillage or leakage from piping

systems. The working clearance space shall

include the zone described in 110.26(A). No

architectural appurtenance or other equipment

shall be located in this zone


10


Table 110.26(A)(1) Working Space. Revised

110.27 Guarding of Live Parts. Revise-

(4) By elevation of 2.5 m (8 ft) or more above

the floor or other working surface as shown

in 110.27(A)(4)(a) or (b) below: .

(a) A minimum of 2.5 m (8 ft) for 50 to 300

volts.

(b) A minimum of 2.6 m (8 ½ ft) for 301 to

600 volts.

110.27 Guarding of Live Parts.

(A) Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental

Contact. Except as elsewhere required or

permitted by this Code, live parts of electrical

equipment operating at 50 volts or more to 1000

volts, nominal shall be guarded against accidental

contact by approved enclosures, or by any of the

following:

(4) By elevation above the floor or other working

surface as follows shown in 110.27(A)(4)(a) or (b)

below:

a. A minimum of 2.5 m (8 ft) for 50 volts to 300

volts between ungrounded conductors.

b. A minimum of 2.6 m (8 ½ ft 6 in.) for 301 volts

to 600 volts between ungrounded conductors.

c. A minimum if 2.62 m (8 ft. 7 in.) for 601 volts to

1000 volts between ungrounded conductors.

110.28 Enclosure Types. Enclosures (other

than surrounding fences or walls) of

switchboards, switchgear, panelboards,

industrial control panels, motor control

centers, meter sockets, enclosed switches,

transfer switches, power outlets, circuit

breakers, adjustable-speed drive systems,

pullout switches, portable power distribution

110.28 Enclosure Types. Enclosures (other than

surrounding fences or walls covered in 110.31) of

switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, industrial

control panels, motor control centers, meter

sockets, enclosed switches, transfer switches,

power outlets, circuit breakers, adjustable-speed

drive systems, pullout switches, portable power

distribution equipment, termination boxes,


11


equipment, termination boxes, general-

purpose transformers, fire pump controllers,

fire pump motors, and motor controllers,

rated not over 600 volts nominal and

intended for such locations, shall be marked

with an enclosure-type number as shown in

Table 110.28.

Table 110.28 shall be used for selecting these

enclosures for use in specific locations other

than hazardous (classified) locations. The

enclosures are not intended to protect

against conditions such as condensation,

icing, corrosion, or contamination that may

occur within the enclosure or enter via the

conduit or unsealed openings.

general-purpose transformers, fire pump

controllers, fire pump motors, and motor

controllers, rated not over 600 1000 volts nominal

and intended for such locations, shall be marked

with an enclosure-type number as shown in Table

110.28.

Table 110.28 shall be used for selecting these

enclosures for use in specific locations other than

hazardous (classified) locations. The enclosures

are not intended to protect against conditions

such as condensation, icing, corrosion, or

contamination that may occur within the

enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed

openings.

110.33 Entrance to Enclosures and Access to

Working Spaces.

(1) Large Equipment. On switchboard

switchgear and control panels exceeding 1.8

m (6 ft) in width, there shall be one entrance

at each end of the equipment. A single

entrance to the required working space shall

be permitted where either of the conditions

in 110.33(A)(1)(a) or (A)(1)(b) is met.

110.33 Entrance to Enclosures and Access to

Working Spaces.

(2) Guarding. Where bare energized parts at any

voltage or insulated energized parts above 600

1000 volts, nominal. To ground are located

adjacent to such entrance, they shall be suitably

guarded.

110.34 Working Space and Guarding.

(D) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided

for all working spaces about electrical equipment.

Control by automatic means only shall not be


12


permitted. The lighting outlets shall be arranged

so that persons changing lamps or making repairs

on the lighting system are not endangered to live

parts, or other equipment.

The points of control shall be located so that

persons are not likely to come in contact with any

live part or moving part of the equipment while

turning on the lights.

Table 110.34(A) Minimum Depth of Clear

Working Space at Electrical Equipment. Revised.

Table 110.34(E) Elevation of Unguarded Live

Parts Above Working Space. Revised.

CHAPTER 2 WIRING AND PROTECTION CHAPTER 2 WIRING AND PROTECTION

ARTICLE 200 Use and Identification of

Grounded Conductors

ARTICLE 200 Use and Identification of Grounded

Conductors

200.2 General.

(A) Insulation. The grounded conductor,

where if insulated, shall have insulation that

is (1) suitable, other than color, for any

ungrounded conductor of the same circuit

on circuits for systems of less than 1000 volts

or less, or impedance grounded neutral

systems of 1 kV over 1000 volts, and over, or

(2) rated not less than 600 volts for solidly


13


grounded neutral systems of over 1000 volts

1 kV and over as described in 250.184(A).

200.4 Neutral Conductors. Neutral

conductors shall be installed in accordance

with 200.4(A) and (B).

(A) Installation. Neutral conductors shall not

be used for more than one branch circuit, for

more than one multiwire branch circuit, or

for more than one set of ungrounded feeder

conductors unless specifically permitted

elsewhere in this Code.

(B) Multiple Circuits. Where more than one

neutral conductor associated with different

circuits is in an enclosure, grounded circuit

conductors of each circuit shall be identified

or grouped to correspond with the

unmarked circuit conductor(s) by wire

markers, cable ties, or similar means in at

least one location within the enclosure.

Exception No. 1: The requirement for

grouping or identifying shall not apply if the

branch-circuit or feeder conductors enter

from a cable or a raceway unique to the

circuit that makes the grouping obvious.

Exception No. 2: The requirement for

grouping or identifying shall not apply where

the branch-circuit conductors pass through a

box or conduit body without a loop as


14


described in 314.16(B)(1) or without a splice

or termination.

ARTICLE 210 BRANCH CIRCUITS ARTICLE 210 BRANCH CIRCUITS

210.2 210.3 Other Articles for Specific- Purpose

Branch Circuits. Table 210.3 lists references for

specific equipment and applications not located in

Chapters 5, 6, and 7 that Branch circuits shall

comply with this article and also with the

applicable provisions of other articles of this

Code, The provisions for branch circuits supplying

equipment listed in Table 210.2 amend or

supplement the provisions requirements in this

article.

Table 210.3 Specific-Purpose Branch Circuits.

Revised.

210.5 Identification for Branch Circuits. (C)

Identification of Ungrounded Conductors.

Revised.

210.5 Identification for Branch Circuits.

(C) (1) Branch Circuits Supplied from More Than

One Nominal Voltage System.

(b) Add- The label shall be of sufficient durability

to withstand the environment involved and shall

not be handwritten.

Exception: In existing installations where a voltage

system(s) already exists and a different voltage

system is being added, it shall be permissible to

mark only the new system voltage. Existing


15


unidentified systems shall not be required to be

identified at each termination, connection, and

splice point in compliance with 210.5(C)(1) (a) and

(b). Labeling shall be required at each voltage

system distribution equipment to identify that

only one voltage system has been marked for a

new system(s). The new system label(s) shall

include the words “other unidentified systems

exist on the premises.”

(C)(2) Branch Circuits Supplied from Direct-

Current Systems.

(a) Positive Polarity.

(4) An approved permanent marking means such

as sleeving or shrink-tubing that is suitable for the

conductor size, at all rumination, connection, and

splice points, with imprinted plus signs (+) or the

word POSITIVE or POS durably marked on

insulation or a color other than green, white, gray,

or black.

(b) Negative Polarity.

(4) An approved permanent marking means such

as sleeving or shrink-tubing that is suitable for the

conductor size, at all rumination, connection, and

splice points, with imprinted minus signs (-) or the

word NEGATIVE or NEG durably marked on

insulation or a color other than green, white, gray,

or red.


16


210.6 Branch-Circuit Voltage Limitations.

(D) (3) Luminaires powered from direct-current

systems where either of the following apply:

a. The luminaire contains a listed, dc-rated ballast

that provides isolation between the dc power

source and the lamp circuit and protection from

electric shock when changing lamps.

b. The luminaire contains a listed, dc-rated ballast

and has no provision for changing lamps.

210.8 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter

Protection for Personnel.

(A) Dwelling Units. Add-

(9) Bathtubs or shower stalls- where

receptacles are installed within 1.8 m (6 ft) of

the outside edge of the bathtub or shower

stall.

(10) Laundry Areas

(B) Other than Dwelling Units. Add-

(4) Outdoors

Exception to No. 1 to (3): Receptacles on

rooftops shall not be required to be readily

accessible other than from the rooftop.


Protection for Personnel. Ground-fault circuit-

interrupter protection for personnel shall be

provided as required in 210.8(A) through (D) (E).

The ground-fault circuit-interrupter shall be

installed in a readily accessible location.

For the purposes of this section, when

determining distance from receptacles the

distance with be measured as the shortest path

the cord of an appliance connected to the

receptacle would follow without piercing a floor,

wall, ceiling, or fixed barrier, or passing through a

door, doorway, or window.

(A) Dwelling Units.

(5) Unfinished basements- for purposes of this

section, unfinished basements are defined as

portions or areas of the basement not intended as


17


(8) Garages, service bays, and similar areas

other than vehicle exhibition halls and

showrooms where electrical diagnostic

equipment, electrical hand tools, or portable

lighting equipment are to be used.

(D) Kitchen Dishwasher Branch Circuit. GFCI

protection shall be provided for outlets that

supply dishwashers installed in dwelling unit

locations.

habitable rooms and limited to storage areas,

work areas, and the like

(7) Sinks- where receptacles are installed within

1.8 m (6 ft) from the top inside of the outside

edge of the sink.

(B) Other than Dwelling Units. All single-phase

receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50

amperes or less and three-phase receptacles

rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or

less installed in the following location shall have

ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for

personnel All 125-volt, single-phase. 15- and 20-

ampere receptacles installed in the locations

specified in 210.8(B)(1) through (8) shall have

ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for

personnel.

(5) Sinks- where receptacles are installed within

1.8 m (6 ft) from the top inside of the outside

edge of the sink.

(9) Crawl spaces- at or below grade level.

(10) Unfinished portions or areas of the basement

not intended as habitable space.

(E) Crawl Space Lighting Outlets. New section.

210.12(B) Branch Circuit Extensions or

Modifications. Deleted.

210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter

Protection. Arc-fault circuit-interrupter

protection shall be provided as required in

210.12(A), (B), and (C). The arc-fault circuit

210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection.

(C) (B) Dormitory Units. All 120-volt, single-phase,

15- and 20-ampere branch circuits supplying


18


interrupter shall be installed in a readily

accessible location.

(A) Dwelling Unit. Completely revised.

(B) Branch Circuit Extensions or

Modifications- Dwelling Unit. Add-

Exception: AFCI protection shall not be

required where the extension of existing

conductors is not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) and

does not include any additional outlets or

devices.

outlets and devices installed in dormitory unit

bedrooms, living rooms, hallways, closets,

bathrooms, and similar rooms shall be protected

by any of the means described in a listed arc-fault

circuit interrupter meeting the requirements of

210.12(A)(1) through (6) as appropriate.

(C) Guest Rooms and Guest Suites. New section.

210.18 Rating. New section.

210.22 Permits. New section.

210.52 Dwelling Unit Receptacle Outlets.

(A)(2)(1) Any space 600 mm (2 ft) or more in

width (including space measured around corners)

and unbroken along the floor line by doorways

and similar openings, fireplaces, and fixed

cabinets that do not have countertops or similar

work surfaces.

(B)(1)

Exception No. 2: In addition to the receptacles

specified by 210.52, a receptacle outlet to serve a

specific appliance The receptacle outlet for

refrigeration equipment shall be permitted to be

supplied from an individual branch circuit rated

15 amperes or greater.


19


(G)(1) Garages. In each attached garage and in

each detached garage with electric power, . The

branch circuit supplying this receptacle(s) shall

not supply outlets outside of the garage. at least

one receptacle outlet shall be installed in each

vehicle bay and not more than 1.7 m (5 ½ ft)

above the floor for each car space.

210.62 Show Windows. At least one A 125-

volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated

receptacle outlet

shall be installed within 450 mm (18 in.) of

the top of a

show window for each 3.7 linear m (12 linear

ft) or major

fraction thereof of show window area

measured horizontally at its maximum width.

210.64 Electrical Service Area. New section. 210.64 Electrical Service Areas. At least one 125-

volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated

receptacle outlet shall be installed in an accessible

location within 7.5 m (25 ft) of the indoor within

15 m (50 ft) of the electrical service equipment.

The required receptacle outlet shall be located

within the same room or area as the service

equipment.

Exception No. 1: The receptacle outlet shall not

be required to be installed in one- and two-family

dwellings.


20


Exception No. 2: When the service voltage is

greater than 120 volts to ground, a receptacle

outlet shall not be required for services dedicated

to equipment covered in Articles 675 and 682.

210.70 Lighting Outlets Required.

(A)(1) Habitable Rooms. At least one wall switch-

controlled lighting outlet shall be installed in

every habitable room, kitchen, and bathroom.

(2) Additional Locations. Additional lighting

outlets shall

be installed in accordance with the following:

(A)(2)(a), (A)(2)(b), and (A)(2)(c).

(a) (1) At least one wall switch–controlled lighting

outlet

shall be installed in hallways, stairways, attached

garages, and detached garages with electric

power.

(b) (2) For dwelling units, attached garages, and

detached garages with electric power, at least

one wall switch–

controlled lighting outlet shall be installed to

provide illumination on the exterior side of

outdoor entrances or exits with grade level

access. A vehicle door in a garage shall not be

considered as an outdoor entrance or exit.

(c) (3) Where one or more lighting outlet(s) are

installed

for interior stairways, there shall be a wall switch

at each


21


floor level, and landing level that includes an

entryway, to control the lighting outlet(s) where

the stairway between floor levels has six risers or

more.

Exception to (A)(2)(a)(1), (A)(2)(b) (2), and

(A)(2)(c)(3): In hallways, in stairways, and at

outdoor entrances, remote, central, or automatic

control of lighting shall be permitted.

(4) Lighting outlets controlled in accordance with

210.70(A)(2)(3) shall not be controlled by use of

dimmer switches unless they provide the full

range of dimming control at each location.

(C) Other Than Dwelling Units All Occupancies.

For attics and underfloor

Spaces, utility rooms, and basements containing

equipment requiring servicing, such as

heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration

equipment, at

least one lighting outlet containing a switch or

controlled

by a wall switch shall be installed where these

spaces are used for storage or contain equipment

requiring servicing in such spaces. At least one

point of control shall be at the usual point of

entry to these spaces. The lighting outlet shall be

provided at or near the equipment requiring

servicing.

210.71 Meeting Rooms. New section.

ARTICLE 215 FEEDERS ARTICLE 215 FEEDERS


22


215.2 Minimum Rating and Size.

(A) Feeders Not More Than 600 Volts.

(1) General. Feeder conductors shall have an

ampacity not less than required to supply

the load as calculated in Parts III, IV, and V of

Article 220. Conductors shall be sized to

carry not less than the larger of

215.2(A)(1)(a) or (b).

(a) Where a feeder supplies continuous loads

or any combination of continuous and

noncontinuous loads, the The minimum

feeder-circuit conductor size, before the

application of any adjustment or correction

factors, shall have an allowable ampacity not

less than the noncontinuous load plus 125

percent of the continuous load.

(b) The minimum feeder conductor size shall

have an allowable ampacity not less than the

maximum load to be served after the

application of any adjustment or correction

factors.

Exception No. 1: If the assembly, including

the overcurrent devices protecting the

feeder(s), is listed for operation at 100

percent of its rating, the allowable ampacity

of the feeder conductors shall be permitted

215.2 Minimum Rating and Size.

(A)(1) General.

Exception No. 1: If the assembly, including the

overcurrent devices protecting the feeder(s), is

listed for operation at 100 percent of its rating,

the allowable ampacity of the feeder conductors

shall be permitted to be not less than the sum of

the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load.

Exception No. 2: Where a portion of a feeder is

connected at both its supply and load ends

separately installed pressure connections as

covered in 110.14(C)(2). It shall be permitt4ed to

have an allowable ampacity not less the sum of

the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load.

No portion of s feeder installed under the

provisions of this exception shall extend into an

enclosure containing either the feeder supply or

the feeder load terminations, as covered in

110.14(C)(1).

Exception No. 2 3: Grounded conductors that are

not connected to an overcurrent device shall be

permitted to be sized at 100 percent of the

continuous and noncontinuous load.


23


to be not less than the sum of the continuous

load plus the noncontinuous load.

Exception No. 2: Grounded conductors that

are not connected to an overcurrent device

shall be permitted to be sized at 100 percent

of the continuous and noncontinuous load.

215.3 Overcurrent Protection.

Exception No. 2: Overcurrent protection for

feeders over between 600 volts to 1000 volts

nominal, shall comply with Parts I through

VIII of Article 240. Feeders over 1000 volts,

nominal, shall comply with Part IX with Part

IX of Article 240.

215.12 Identification for Feeders. Revised

section.

Add-

(1) Feeders Supplied from More Than

One Nominal Voltage System. New

section.

(2) Feeders Supplied from Direct-

Current Systems. New section.

215.12 Identification for Feeders.

(C)(2) Feeders Supplied from Direct-Current

Systems.

(a)(4) All approved permanent marking means

such as sleeving or shrink-tubing that is suitable

for the conductor size, at all terminals,

connections, and splice points, with imprinted

plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS durably

marked on insulation of a color other than green,

white, gray, or black.

(b)(4) All approved permanent marking means

such as sleeving or shrink-tubing that is suitable

for the conductor size, at all terminals,

connections, and splice points, with imprinted


24


minus signs (-) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG

durably marked on insulation of a color other

than green, white, gray, or red.

ARTICLE 220 BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER,

AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS

ARTICLE 220 BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND

SERVICE CALCULATIONS

220.3 Other Articles for Specific-Purpose

Calculations. New section.

220.12 Lighting Load for Specified

Occupancies.

Exception: Where the building is designed

and constructed to comply with an energy

code adopted by the local authority, the

lighting load shall be permitted to be

calculated at the values specified in the

energy code where the following conditions

are met:

(1) A power monitoring system is

installed that will provide continuous

information regarding the total

general lighting load of the building.

(2) The power monitoring system will

be set with alarm values to alert the

building owner or manager if the

lighting load exceeds the values set

by the energy code.

220.12 Lighting Load for Specified Occupancies

Exception No. 1: Where the building is designed

and constructed to comply with an energy code

adopted by the local authority, the lighting load

shall be permitted to be calculated at the values

specified in the energy code where the following

conditions are met:

(1) A power monitoring system is installed

that will provide continuous information

regarding the total general lighting load of

the building.

(2) The power monitoring system will be set

with alarm values to alert the building

owner or manager if the lighting load

exceeds the values set by the energy code.

(3) The demand factors specified in 220.42

are not applied to the general lighting

load.


25


(3) The demand factors specified in

220.42 are not applied to the general

lighting load.

Exception No. 2: Where a building is designed and

constructed to comply with an energy code

adopted by the local authority and specifying an

overall lighting density of lss than13.5 volt-

amperes/13.5 m2 (1.2 volt-amperes/1.2 ft2), the

unit lighting loads in Table 220.12 for office and

bank areas within the building shall be permitted

to be reduced by 11 volt-amperes/11 m2 (1 volt-

amperes. 1 ft2).

ARTICLE 225 Outside Branch Circuits and

Feeders

ARTICLE 225 Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders

225.4 Conductor Covering. Where within 3.0

m (10 ft) of

any building or structure other than

supporting poles or

towers, open individual (aerial) overhead

conductors shall be insulated or covered for

the nominal voltage. Conductors in cables or

raceways, except Type MI cable, shall be of

the rubber-covered type or thermoplastic

type and, in wet locations, shall comply with

310.10(C). Conductors for festoon lighting

shall be of the rubber-covered or

thermoplastic type.

Exception: Equipment grounding conductors

and grounded


26


circuit conductors shall be permitted to be

bare or covered as

specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code.

225.10 Wiring in Buildings (or Other Buildings).

Revised.

225.11 Feeder and Branch-Circuit

Conductors Entering, Exiting, or Attached to

Buildings or Structures. New section.

225.12 Open-Conductor Supports. Open

conductors

shall be supported on knobs, glass or porcelain

knobs, racks, brackets, or strain insulators that

are made of glass, porcelain, or other approved

materials.

225.14 Open-Conductor Spacings. Revise-

(A) 600 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less.

Conductors of 600 1000 volts, nominal, or

less, shall comply with the spacings provided

in Table 230.51(C).

(B) Over 600 1000 Volts, Nominal.

Conductors of over 600 1000 volts, nominal,

shall comply with the spacings provided in

110.36 and 490.24.

225.17 Masts as Supports. Only feeder or

branch-circuit conductors specified within

this section shall be permitted to be


27


attached to the feeder and/or branch-circuit

mast. Masts Where a mast is used for the

support of final spans of feeders or branch

circuits shall be installed in accordance with

225.17(A) and (B).

(A) Strength. The mast , it shall be of

adequate strength or be supported

by braces or guys to withstand safely

the strain imposed by the overhead

feeder or branch-circuit conductors

drop. Hubs intended for use with a

conduit that serves as a mast for

support of feeder or branch-circuit

conductors shall be identified for use

with a mast.

(B) Attachment. Feeder and/or branch-

circuit conductors shall not be

attached to a mast between a

weatherhead or the end of the

conduit and a coupling where the

coupling is located above the last

point of securement to the building

or other structure or is located above

the building or other structure.

Where raceway-type masts are used, all

raceway fittings shall be identified for use

with masts. Only the feeder or branch circuit

conductors specified within this section shall

be permitted to be attached to the feeder

and/or branch-circuit mast.


28


225.20 Mechanical Protection of Conductors

Protection Against Physical Damage. Mechanical

protection of Conductors installed on buildings,

structures, or poles shall be protected against

physical damage as provided for services in

230.50.

225.30 Number of Supplies.

(A) Special Conditions. Add-

(7) Electric vehicle charging systems listed,

labeled, and identified for more than a single

branch circuit or feeder.

225.32 Location. The disconnection shall be

installed either inside or attached to the

outside of the building or structure served or

where the conductors pass through the

building or structure.

The disconnecting means shall be at a

readily accessible location nearest the point

of entrance of the conductors. For the

purpose of this section, the requirements in

230.6 shall be permitted to be utilized.

Exception No. 1: For installations under

single management, where documented safe

switching

procedures are established and maintained

for disconnection and where the installation

is monitored by qualified individuals, the


29


disconnected means shall be permitted to be

located elsewhere on the premises.

Exception No. 2: For buildings or other

structures qualified under the provisions of

Article 685, the disconnecting means shall

be permitted to be located elsewhere on the

premises.

Exception No. 3: For towers or poles used

as lighting standards, the disconnecting

means shall be permitted to be located

elsewhere on the premises.

Exception No. 4: For poles or similar

structure used only for support of signs

installed in accordance with Article 600, the

disconnecting means shall be permitted to be

located elsewhere on the premises.

Exception No. 5: The disconnecting means

may be located independent of the building

or structure served, in direct line of sight,

but not to exceed thirty feet (30’).

Exception No. 6: The service disconnecting

means may be installed within a building

when an external remote shunt trip switch is

provided. All shunt trip switches shall be

located at seven feet (7’) above finish grade

at a location approved by the fire

department. All shunt trip switches

shall be located within a twelve inch (12”)

equilateral triangle, red in color.

225.36 Suitable for Service Equipment. The

disconnecting means specified in 225.31


30


shall be comprised of a circuit breaker,

molded case switch, snap switch, or other

approved means. Where applied in

accordance with 250.32(B), Exception 1, the

disconnecting means shall be suitable for use

as service equipment.

Exception: For garages and outbuildings on

residential property, a snap switch or a set of

3-way or 4-way snap switches shall be

permitted as the disconnecting means.

225.36 Suitable for Service Equipment Type. 225.36 Type of Disconnecting Means.

225.38 Disconnect Construction. Disconnecting

means

shall meet the requirements of 225.38(A) through

(D).

Exception: For garages and outbuildings on

residential

property, snap switches or 3-way or 4-way snap

switches shall be permitted as the disconnecting

means.

(C) Disconnection of Grounded Conductor.

Where the

building or structure disconnecting means does

not disconnect the grounded conductor from the

grounded conductors in the building or structure

wiring, other means shall be provided for this

purpose at the location of disconnecting means. A

terminal or bus to which all grounded conductors

can be attached by means of pressure connectors

shall be permitted for this purpose.


31


In a multisection switchboard or swichgear,

disconnects for the grounded conductor shall be

permitted to be in any section of the switchboard

or switchgear; if the provided any such

switchboard section or switchgear section is

marked to indicate a grounded conductor

disconnect is contained within the equipment.

225.52 Disconnecting Means.

(A) Location. A building or structure

disconnecting means

shall be located in accordance with 225.32,

or if not readily accessible, it shall be

operable by mechanical linkage from a

readily accessible point. For multibuilding

industrial installations under single

management it shall be permitted to be

electrically operated by a readily accessible,

similarly located remote-control device in a

separate building or structure.

225.56 Inspections and Tests.

(A) Pre-Energization and Operating Tests.

The complete

electrical system design, including settings

for protective, switching, and control circuits,

shall be prepared in advance and made

available on request to the authority having

jurisdiction and shall be performance tested


32


when first installed on-site. Each protective,

switching, and control circuit shall be

adjusted in accordance with the system

design recommendations of the protective

device study and tested by actual operation

using current injection or equivalent

methods as necessary to ensure that each

and every such circuit operates correctly to

the satisfaction of the authority having

jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 230 Services ARTICLE 230 Services

230.6 Conductors Considered Outside the

Building. Revise-

(5) Where installed within rigid metal

conduit (Type RMC) or intermediate metal

conduit (IMC) used to accommodate the

clearance requirement in230.24 and routed

directly through the eave but not a wall of a

building. in overhead service masts on the

outside surface of the building traveling

through the eave of that building to meet

the requirements of 230.24

230.7 Other Conductors in Raceway or Cable.

Conductors other than service conductors shall

not be installed in the same service raceway or

service cable in which the service conductors are

installed.


33


Exception No. 1: Grounding electrode conductors

or supply side and equipment bonding

Jumpers or conductors shall be permitted within

service raceways.

Exception No. 2: Load management control

conductors having overcurrent protection shall be

permitted within service raceways.

230.10 Vegetation as Support. Vegetation such as

trees shall not be used for support of overhead

service conductors or service equipment.

230.14 Clearances.

(B) Vertical Clearance for Overhead Service

Conductors. Add-

(5) 7.5 m (241/2 ft.) over tracks of railroads.

230.28 Service Masts as Supports. Where a

service mast is used for the support of

service-drop conductors, it shall be of

adequate strength or be supported by braces

or guys to withstand safely the strain

imposed by the service drop. Where

raceway-type service masts are used, all

raceway fittings shall be identified for use

with service masts. Only power service-drop

or overhead service conductors shall be

permitted to be attached to a service mast.

Service masts used for the support of

service-drop or overhead service conductors

shall be installed in accordance with

230.28(A) and (B).

(A) Strength. The service mast shall be of

adequate strength or be supported


34


by braces or guys to withstand safely

the strain imposed by the service-

drop or overhead service conductors.

Hubs intended for use with a conduit

that serves as a service mast shall be

identified for use with service

entrance equipment.

(B) Attachment. Service-drop or

overhead service conductors shall not

be attached to a service made

between a weatherhead or the end

of the conduit or the end of the

conduit and a coupling, where the

coupling is located above the last

point of securement to the building

or other structure or is located above

the building or other structure.

230.29 Supports over Buildings. Service

conductors

passing over a roof shall be securely supported by

substantial structures. For a grounded system,

where the substantial structure is metal, it shall

be bonded by means of a bonding jumper and

listed connector to the grounded overhead

service conductor. Where practicable, such

supports shall be independent of the building.

230.30 Insulation Installation.

(A) Insulation. Renumbered.

(B) Wiring Methods. New subsection.


35


230.42 Minimum Size and Rating.

(A) General. Insert-

(2) The sum of the noncontinuous load plus

the continuous load after the application of

any adjust or correction factors.

230.42 Minimum Size and Rating.

(A) General. The ampacity of the service-entrance

conductors shall before the application of any

adjustment or correction factors shall not be less

than either 230.42(A)(1) or (A)(2). Loads shall be

determined in accordance with Part III, IV, or V of

Article 220, as applicable. Ampacity shall be

determined from 310.15. The maximum allowable

current of busways shall be that value for which

the busway has been listed or labeled.

(1) Where the service-entrance conductors supply

continuous loads or any combination of

noncontiunous and continuous loads, the

minimum service-entrance conductor size shall

have an allowable ampacity not less than the sum

of the noncontinuous loads plus 125 percent of

continuous loads.

Exception No. 1: Grounded conductors that are

not connected to an overcurrent device shall be

permitted to be sized at 100 percent of the sum of

the continuous and noncontinuous load.

(3) Exception No. 2: The sum of the

noncontinuous load plus the continuous load if

the service-entrance conductors terminate in a

overcurrent device where both the overcurrent

device and tis assembly are listed for operation at

100 percent of their rating shall be permitted.

(2) The sum of the noncontinuous load plus the

continuous load after the application of and

adjustment or correction factors.

(3) The sum of the noncontinuous load plus the

continuous load if the service-entrance


36


conductors terminate in a overcurrent device

where both the overcurrent device and tis

assembly are listed for operation at 100 percent

of their rating.

230.44 Cable Trays. Cable tray systems shall be

permitted to support service-entrance

conductors. Cable trays used to support service-

entrance conductors shall contain only service-

entrance conductors and shall be limited to the

following methods:

(1) Type SE cable

(2) Type MC cable

(3) Type MI cable

(4) Type IGS cable

(5) Single conductors 1/0 and larger that are listed

for use in cable tray.

Such cable trays shall be identified with

permanently

affixed labels with the wording “Service-Entrance

Conductors.” The labels shall be located so as to

be visible after installation with a spacing not to

exceed 3 m (10 ft) so that the service-entrance

conductors are able to be readily traced through

the entire length of the cable tray.

230.66 Marking. Service equipment rated at 600

volts or

less shall be marked to identify it as being suitable

for use

as service equipment. All service equipment shall

be listed or field labeled. Individual meter socket

enclosures shall not be considered service


37


equipment but shall be listed and rated for the

voltage and ampacity of the service.

Exception: Meter sockets supplied by and under

the exclusive control of an electric utility shall not

be required to be listed.

230.70(A)(1) Readily Accessible Location.

The service disconnection means shall be

installed outside of a building or other

structure at a readily accessible location

nearest the point of entrance of the service

conductors. The disconnecting means may

be located independent of the

building or structure served, in direct line of

sight, but not to exceed thirty feet (30’). at a

readily accessible location either outside of a

building or structure or inside nearest the

point of entrance of the service conductors.

Exception: The service disconnecting

means may be installed within a building

when an external remote shunt trip switch is

provided. All shunt trip switches shall be

located at seven feet (7’) above finish grade

at a location approved by the fire

department. All shunt trip switches shall be

located within a twelve inch (12”)

equilateral triangle, red in color.

230.75 Disconnection of Grounded Conductor.

Where

the service disconnecting means does not

disconnect the

grounded conductor from the premises wiring,

other means shall be provided for this purpose in

the service equipment. A terminal or bus to which


38


all grounded conductors can be attached by

means of pressure connectors shall be permitted

for this purpose. In a multisection switchboard or

swichgear, disconnects

for the grounded conductor shall be permitted to

be in

any section of the switchboard or switchgear; if

the provided any such switchboard or switchgear

section is marked to indicate a grounded

conductor disconnect is located within.

230.82 Equipment Connected to the Supply Side

of Service Disconnect.

(6) Solar photovoltaic systems, fuel cell systems,

wind electric systems, energy storage systems or

interconnected electric power production

sources.

230.91 Location. The service overcurrent device

shall be

an integral part of the service disconnecting

means or shall be located immediately adjacent

thereto. Where fuse are used as the service

overcurrent device, the disconnecting means shall

be located ahead of the supply side of the fuses.

ARTICLE 240 Overcurrent Protection ARTICLE 240 Overcurrent Protection

240.1 Scope. Parts I through VII of this article

provide the general requirements for

overcurrent protection and overcurrent

protective devices not more than 600 1000

volts, nominal. Part VIII covers overcurrent


39


protection for those portions of supervised

industrial installations operating at voltages

of not more than 600 1000 volts, nominal.

Part IX covers overcurrent protection over

600 1000 volts, nominal.

240.13 Ground-Fault Protection of

Equipment. Ground-fault protection of

equipment shall be provided in accordance

with the provisions of 230.95 for solidly

grounded wye electrical systems of more

than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding

600 1000 volts phase-to-phase for each

individual device used as a building or

structure main disconnecting means rated

1000 amperes or more.

The provisions of this section shall not apply

to the disconnecting means for the

following:

(1) Continuous industrial processes where a

nonorderly shutdown will introduce

additional or increased hazards

(2) Installations where ground-fault

protection is provided by other requirements

for services or feeders

(3) Fire pumps

240.21 Location in Circuit.

(B)(1) Taps Not over 3 m (10 ft) Long.


40


(1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is

a. Not less than the combined calculated

loads on the circuits supplied by the tap

conductors, and

b. Not less than the rating of the equipment

containing an overcurrent device(s) supplied

by the tap conductors or not less than the

rating of the overcurrent protective device at

the termination of the tap conductors.

Exception to b: Where listed equipment,

such as a surge protective device(s) [SPD(s)],

is provided with specific instructions on

minimum conductor sizing, the ampacity of

the tap conductors supplying that equipment

shall be permitted to be determined based

on the manufacturer’s instruction.

(C)(2) Transformer Secondary Conductors

Not over 3 m (10 ft) Long.

(1) The ampacity of the secondary

conductors is

a. Not less than the combined calculated

loads on the circuits supplied by the

secondary conductors, and

b. Not less than the rating of the equipment

containing overcurrent device(s) supplied by

the secondary conductors or not less than


41


the rating of the overcurrent-protective

device at the termination of the secondary

conductors.

Exception. Where listed equipment, such as

surge protective device(s) [SPD(s)], is

provided with specific instructions on

minimum conductor sizing, the capacity of

the tap conductors supplying that equipment

shall be permitted to be determined based

on the manufacturer’s instructions.

240.24 Location in or on Premises.

(A) Accessibility. Switches containing fuses and

circuit breakers shall Overcurrent devices shall be

readily accessible and shall be installed so that the

center of the grip of the operating handle of the

switch or circuit breaker, when in its highest

position, is not more than 2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.) above

the floor or working platform, unless one of the

following applies:

(1) For busways, as provided in 368.17(C).

(2) For supplementary overcurrent protection, as

described in 240.10.

(3) For overcurrent devices, as described in

225.40 and

230.92.

(4) For overcurrent devices adjacent to utilization

equipment that they supply, access shall be

permitted to be by portable means.

Exception: The use of a tools shall be permitted to

access overcurrent devices located within listed

industrial control panels or similar enclosures.


42


240.51(B) Replacement Only. Plug fuses of

the Edison-based shall be used only for

replacement in existing installations where

there is no evidence of overfusing or

tampering. In any existing building where

alterations or additions are made to any of

the premises wiring, all fuse holders shall

comply with Section 240.54.

240.87 Arc Energy Reduction. New section. 240.87 Arc Energy Reduction.

(B) Method to Reduce Clearing Time. One of the

following or approved equivalent means shall be

provided:

Add or revise-

(5) An instantaneous trip setting that is less than

the available arcing current

(6) In instantaneous override that is less than the

available arcing current

(7) An approved equivalent means.

ARTICLE 250 Grounding and Bonding ARTICLE 250 Grounding and Bonding

Table 250.3 Additional Grounding and Bonding

Requirements. Revised.

250.22 Circuits Not to Be Grounded.


43


(6) Class 2 load side circuits for suspended ceiling

low-voltage power grid distribution systems as

provided in 393.60(B).

250.30 Grounding Separately Derived

Alternating-Current Systems. In addition to

complying with 250.30(A)for grounded

systems, or as provided in 250.30(B) for

ungrounded systems, separately derived

systems shall comply with 250.20, 250.21,

250.22, and 250.26, as applicable. Multiple

separately derived systems that are

connected in parallel shall be installed in

accordance with 250.30.

(A)(1) System Bonding Jumper.

Exception No. 2: If the building or structure is

supplied by a feeder from an outdoor

transformer, a A system bonding jumper at

both the source and the first disconnecting

means shall be permitted if doing so does not

establish a parallel path for the grounded

conductor. If a grounded conductor is used in

this manner, it shall not be smaller than the

size specified for the system bonding jumper

but shall not be required to be larger than

the ungrounded conductor(s). For the

purposes of this exception, connection

through the earth shall not be considered as

providing a parallel path.

250.30 Grounding Separately Derived

Alternating-Current Systems.

(A)(1) System Bonding Jumper.

Exception No. 2: If the building or structure is

supplied by a feeder from an outdoor transformer

separating derived system, a system bonding

jumper at both the source and the first

disconnecting means shall be permitted if doing so

does not establish a parallel path for the

grounded conductor. If a grounded conductor is

used in this manner, it shall not be smaller than

the size specified for the system bonding jumper

but shall not be required to be larger than the

ungrounded conductor(s). For the purposes of this

exception, connection through the earth shall not

be considered as providing a parallel path.

(A)(4) Grounding Electrode. The building or

structure grounding electrode system shall be

used as the grounding electrode for the

separately derived system. If located outdoors,

the grounding electrode shall be in accordance

with 250.30(C). as near as practicable to, and

preferably in the same area as, the grounding

electrode conductor connection to the system.

The grounding electrode shall be the nearest of

one of the following:


44


(1) Metal water pipe grounding electrode as

specified in

250.52(A)(1)

(2) Structural metal grounding electrode as

specified in

250.52(A)(2)

Exception No. 1: Any of the other electrodes

identified in

250.52(A) shall be used if the electrodes specified

by

250.30(A)(4) are not available.

Exception No. 2 to (1) and (2): If a separately

derived

system originates in is listed and identified as

suitable for use as service equipment, equipment

suitable for use as

service equipment, the grounding electrode used

for the

service or feeder equipment shall be permitted to

be used as the grounding electrode for the

separately derived system.

(A)(6) (a) Common Grounding Electrode

Conductor. The common grounding electrode

conductor shall be permitted to be one of the

following:

(1) A conductor of the wire type not smaller than

3/0 AAWG copper or 250 kcmil aluminum

(2) A metal water pipe that complies with

250.68(C)(1)

(2) (3) The metal structural frame of the building

or structure that complies with 250.52(A)(2)

250.68(C)(2) or is connected to the grounding


45


electrode system by a conductor of that shall not

be smaller than 3/0 AWG copper of 250 kcmil

aluminum

250.32 Buildings or Structures Supplied by a

Feeder(s) or Branch Circuit(s).

(1) Supplied by a Feeder or Branch Circuit.

Add-

Exception No. 2: If system bonding jumpers

are installed in accordance with

250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 2, the feeder

grounded circuit conductor at the building or

structure served shall be connected to the

equipment grounding conductors, grounding

electrode conductor, and the enclosure for

the first disconnecting means.

250.52 Grounding Electrodes.

(A)(2) Metal In-Ground Support Structures. New

subsection.

(A)(7)(B) Not Permitted for Use as Grounding

Electrodes. Add-

(3) The structures and structural reinforcing steel

described in 680.26(B)(1) and (B)(20.

250.62 Grounding Electrode Conductor

Material. The grounding electrode conductor

shall be of copper, aluminum, or copper-clad

aluminum, or the items as permitted in

250.62 Grounding Electrode Conductor Material.

(B) Securing and Protection Against Physical

Damage. Revised.


46


250.68(C). The material selected shall be

resistant to any corrosive condition existing

at the installation or shall be protected

against corrosion. Conductors of wire type

The conductor shall be solid or stranded,

insulated, covered, or bare.

250.64 Grounding Electrode Conductor

Installation.

(B) Securing and Protection Against Physical

Damage. Add- Grounding electrode

conductors and grounding electrode bonding

jumpers shall not be required to comply with

300.5.

(D)(2). Individual Grounding Electrode

Conductors. A

grounding electrode conductor shall be

connected between the grounding electrode

system and one or more of the following, as

applicable:

(1) Grounded conductor in each service

equipment disconnecting means

enclosure

(2) Equipment grounding conductor

installed with the feeder

(3) Supply-side bonding jumper

Each grounding electrode conductor shall be

sized in accordance with 250.66 based on


47


the service-entrance or feeder conductor(s)

supplying the individual disconnecting

means.

(D)(3) Common Location. A grounding

electrode conductor shall be connected in a

wireway or other accessible enclosure on the

supply side of the disconnecting means to

one or more of the following, as applicable:

(1) to the Grounded service conductor(s)

(2) Equipment grounding conductor installed

with the feeder

(3) Supply-side bonding jumper

In a wireway or other accessible enclosure

on the supply side of the service

disconnecting means. The connection shall

be made with exothermic welding or a

connector listed as grounding and bonding

equipment. The grounding electrode

conductor shall be sized in accordance with

250.66 based on the service-entrance

conductor(s) at the common location where

the connection is made.

250.66 Size of Alternating-Current Grounding

Electrode

Conductor.

(A) Connections to Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrodes.

Where If the grounding electrode conductor or

bonding jumper is connected to a single or


48


multiple rod, pipe, or plate electrodes, or any

combination thereof, as permitted described in

250.52(A)(5) or (A)(7), does not extend on to

other types of electrodes that require a larger size

conductor, the grounding electrode conductor

that portion of the conductor that is the sole

connection to the grounding electrode(s) shall not

be required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire

or 4 AWG aluminum wire.

(B) Connections to Concrete-Encased Electrodes.

Where If the grounding electrode conductor or

bonding jumper is connected to a single or

multiple concrete-encased electrode(s) as

permitted described in 250.52(A)(3), does not

extend on to other types of electrodes that

require a larger size of conductor, the grounding

electrode conductor that portion of the conductor

that is the sole connection to the grounding

electrode(s) shall not be required to be larger

than 4 AWG copper wire.

(C) Connections to Ground Rings. Where If the

grounding electrode conductor or bonding jumper

is connected to a ground ring as permitted

described in 250.52(A)(4), does not extend on to

other types of electrodes that require a larger size

of conductor, the grounding electrode conductor

that portion of the conductor that is the sole

connection to the grounding electrode shall not

be required to be larger than the conductor used

for the ground ring.


49


250.68 Grounding Electrode Conductor and

Bonding Jumper Connection to Grounding

Electrodes.

(C) Grounding Electrode Connections. Add-

(3) A concrete-encased electrode of either

the conductor type, reinforcing rod or bar

installed in accordance with 250.52(A)(3)

extended from its location within the

concrete to an accessible location above the

concrete shall be permitted.

250.68 Grounding Electrode Conductor and

Bonding Jumper Connection to Grounding

Electrodes.

(C) Grounding Electrode Connections.

(1) Interior metal water piping located not more

than 1.52 m (5 ft) from the point of entrance to

the building shall be permitted to extend the

connection to an electrode(s). Interior metal

water piping located more than 1.52 m (5 ft) from

the point of entrance to the building shall not be

used as a conductor to interconnect electrodes

that are part of the grounding electrode system.

Exception: In industrial, commercial, and

institutional

buildings or structures, if conditions of

maintenance and

supervision ensure that only qualified persons

service the

installation, interior metal water piping located

more than 1.52 m (5 ft) from the point of entrance

to the building shall be permitted as a bonding

conductor to interconnect electrodes that are part

of the grounding electrode system, or as a

grounding electrode conductor, if the entire

length, other than short sections passing

perpendicularly through walls, floors, or ceilings,

of the interior metal water pipe that is being used

for the conductor is exposed.

2.The metal structural frame of a building shall be

permitted to be used as a conductor to

interconnect electrodes that are part of the

grounding electrode system, or as a grounding


50


electrode conductor. Hold-down bolts securing

the structural steel column that are connected to

a concrete-encased electrode that complies with

250.52 (A)(3) and is located in the support footing

or foundation shall be permitted to connect the

metal structural frame of the building or structure

to the concrete encased grounding electrode. The

hold-down bolts shall be connected to the

concrete-encased electrode by welding, the usual

steel tie wires, or other approved means.

(3) A rebar-type concrete-encased electrode of

either the conductor type, reinforcing rod or bar

installed in accordance with 250.52(A)(3) with an

additional rebar section extended from its

location within the concrete to an accessible

location that is not subject to corrosion above the

concrete shall be permitted for connection of

grounding electrode conductors and bonding

jumpers. The rebar extension shall not be

exposed to contact with the earth without

corrosion protection.

250.94 Bonding for Other Communication

Systems. Revised.

(A) General The Intersystem Boding Termination

Device. Revised.

(B) Other Means. New subsection.

250.96(A) General Metal raceways, cable

trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures,

frames, fittings, and other metal non-current-

carrying parts that are to serve as ground


51


conductors, with or without the use of

supplementary equipment grounding

conductors, shall be effectively bonded

where necessary to ensure electrical

continuity and the capacity to conduct safely

any fault current likely to be imposed on

them. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or

similar coating shall be removed at threads,

contact points, and contact surfaces or be

connected by means of fittings

designed so as to make such removal

unnecessary. The Authority Having

Jurisdiction shall require a supplementary

grounding conductor where a metallic

raceway is subject to damage or likely to be

disturbed.

FPN: An example of ‘subject to damage’

might be a surface mounted conduit along a

traffic path in a warehouse. An example of

‘likely to be disturbed’ might be conduit

across a rooftop, where re-roofing

operations will require the conduit to be

removed.

250.104 Bonding of Piping Systems and

Exposed Structural Steel.

(B) Other Metal Piping. If installed in, or

attached to, a building or structure, a metal

piping system(s), including gas piping, that is

likely to become energized shall be bonded

to any of the following:

250.104 Bonding of Piping Systems and Exposed

Structural Metal

(A) Metal Water Piping. The metal water piping

system

shall be bonded as required in (A)(1), (A)(2), or

(A)(3) of

this section. The bonding jumper(s) shall be

installed in

accordance with 250.64(A), (B), and (E). The

points of


52


(1) Equipment grounding conductor for

the circuit that is likely to energize

the piping system

(2) Service equipment enclosure

(3) Grounded conductor at the service

(4) Grounding electrode conductor, if of

sufficient size

(5) One or more grounding electrodes

used

the service equipment enclosure; the

grounded conductor at the service; the

grounding electrode conductor, if of

sufficient size; or to one or more grounding

electrodes used. The bonding conductor(s)

or jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance

with 250.122, using the rating of the circuit

that is likely to energize the piping system(s).

The equipment grounding conductor for the

circuit that is likely to energize the piping

shall be permitted to serve as the bonding

means. The points of attachment of the

bonding jumper(s) shall be accessible.

attachment of the bonding jumper(s) shall be

accessible.

(1) General. Metal water piping system(s)

installed in or

attached to a building or structure shall be

bonded to any of the following:



(3) Grounding electrode conductor where of

sufficient size

(4) One or more grounding electrodes used, if

the grounding electrode conductor or

bonding jumper to the grounding

electrode is of sufficient size.

The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized installed in

accordance with Table 250.66 except as

permitted in 250.104(A)(2) and (A)(3) 250.64(A),

250.64(B), and 250.64(E). The points of


accessible. The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in

accordance with Table 250.102(C)(1) except as

permitted in 250.104(A)(2) and 250.104(A)(3).

(B) Other Metal Piping. If installed in, or attached

to, a building or structure, a metal piping

system(s), including gas piping, that is likely to

become energized shall be bonded to any of the

following:

(1) Equipment grounding conductor for the

circuit that is likely to energize the piping

system



53




sufficient size





C) Structural Metal. Exposed structural metal that

is interconnected to form a metal building frame

and is not

intentionally grounded or bonded and is likely to

become

energized shall be bonded to any of the following:



(3) Disconnecting means for buildings or

structures supplied by a feeder or branch

circuit


sufficient size





The bonding conductor(s) or jumper(s) shall be

sized in accordance with Table 250.66

250.102(C)(1) and installed in accordance with

250.64(A), 250.64(B), and 250.64(E). The points of


accessible unless installed in compliance with

250.68(A), Exception No. 2.


54


(D) Separately Derived Systems. Metal water

piping systems and structural metal that is

interconnected to form a building frame shall be

bonded to separately derived systems in

accordance with 250.104(D)(1) through

250.104(D)(3).

250.119 Identification or Equipment

Grounding Conductors. Add-

Exception No. 2: Flexible cords having an

integral insulation and jacket without an

equipment grounding conductor shall be

permitted to have a continuous outer finish

that is green.

Exception No. 3: Conductors with green

insulation shall be permitted to be used as

ungrounded signal conductors where

installed between the output terminations of

traffic signal control and traffic signal

indicating heads. Signaling circuits installed

in accordance with this exception shall

include an equipment grounding conductor

in accordance with 250.118. Wire-type

equipment grounding conductors shall be

bare or have insulation or covering that is

green with one or more yellow stripes.

250.119 Identification or Equipment Grounding

Conductors.

(C) Flexible Cord. Equipment grounding

conductors in flexible cords shall be insulated and

An uninsulated equipment grounding conductor

shall be permitted, but, if individually covered,

the covering shall have a continuous outer finish

that is either green or green with one or more

yellow stripes.

250.121 Use of Equipment Grounding

Conductors. Add-


55


Exception: A wire-type equipment grounding

conductor installed in compliance with

250.6(A) and the applicable requirements for

both the equipment grounding conductor

and the grounding electrode conductor and

the grounding electrode conductor in Parts

II, III, and VI of this article shall be permitted

to serve as both an equipment grounding

conductor and a grounding electrode

conductor.

250.122 Size of Equipment Grounding

Conductors. Revise-

(B) Increased in Size. Where ungrounded

conductors are increased in size from the

minimum size that has sufficient ampacity

for the intended installation, wire type,

equipment grounding conductors, where

installed, shall be increased in size

proportionately according to the circular mil

area of the ungrounded conductors.


Conductors.

(F) Conductors in Parallel. For circuits of parallel

conductors as permitted in 310.10(H), the

equipment grounding conductor shall be installed

in accordance with (1) of (2). Where conductors

are installed in parallel in multiple raceways or

cables as permitted in 310.10(H), the equipment

grounding conductors, where used, shall be

installed in parallel in each raceway or cable.

Where conductors are installed in parallel in the

same raceway, cable, or cable tray as permitted in

310.10(H), a single equipment grounding

conductor shall be permitted. Equipment

grounding conductors installed in cable tray shall

meet the minimum requirements of

392.10(B)(1)(c).

Each equipment grounding conductor shall be

sized incompliance with 250.122.

250.130 Equipment Grounding Conductor

Connections.


56


(C) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement

or Branch Circuit Extensions. Insert-

(4) An equipment grounding conductor that

is part if another branch circuit that

originates from the enclosure where the

branch circuit for the receptacle or branch

circuit originates.

250.166 Size of the Direct-Current

Grounding Electrode

Conductor. The size of the grounding

electrode conductor for a dc system shall be

as specified in 250.166(A) and (B), except as

permitted by 250.166(C) through (E).

The grounding electrode conductor for a dc

system shall meet the sizing requirements in

this section but shall not be required to be

larger than 3/0 copper or 250 kcmil

aluminum.

250.167 Direct-Current Ground-Fault

Detection. New section.

250.186 Ground-Fault Circuit Conductor

Brought to Service Equipment. New section

and subsections inserted.

250.187 Impedance Grounded Neutral System.


57


(B) Identified and Insulated. The neutral

conductor shall comply with both of the

following:

(1) The neutral conductor shall be identified.

(2) The neutral conductor shall be insulated for

the maximum neutral voltage.

of an impedance grounded neutral system shall

be identified, as well as fully insulated with the

same insulation as the phase conductors.

250.194 Grounding and Bonding of Fences

and Other Metal Structures. New section

and subsections.

ARTICLE 280

Surge Arresters, Over 1000 Volts

280.12 Uses Not Permitted. New section.

ARTICLE 285 Surge-Protective Devices

(SPDs), 1000 Volts or Less

285.13 Type 4 and Other Component Type

SPDs. New section.

Chapter3 Wiring Methods and Materials


58


ARTICLE 300 General Requirements for

Wiring Methods and Materials

ARTICLE 300 General Requirements for Wiring

Methods and Materials

300.7 Raceways Exposed to Different

Temperatures.

(B) Expansion, Expansion-Deflection, and

Deflection Fittings. Raceways shall be

provided with expansion, expansion

deflection, or deflection fittings where

necessary to compensate for thermal

expansion and contraction.

300.5 Underground Buildings

(G) Raceway Seals. Conduits or raceways through

which

moisture may contact live parts shall be sealed or

plugged at either or both ends. Spare and unused

raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be

identified for use with the cable insulation,

conductor insulation, bare conductor, shield, or

other components.

300.22 Wiring in Ducts Not Used for Air

Handling, Fabricated Ducts for Environmental

Air, and Other Spaces for Environmental Air

(Plenum)

(B) Ducts Specifically Fabricated for

Environmental Air.

Exception: Wiring methods and cabling systems,

listed for use other spaces used for environmental

air (plenums), shall be permitted to be installed in

ducts specifically fabricated for environmental air-

handling purposes under the following conditions:

(1) The wiring methods and cabling systems

shall be permitted only if necessary to

connect to equipment or devices


59


associated with the direct action upon or

sensing of the contained air, and

(2) The total length of such wiring methods or

cabling systems shall not exceed 1.2 m (4

ft).

300.37 Aboveground Wiring Method.

Exception: Airfield lighting cable used in series

circuits that are powered by regulators and

installed in restricted airport lighting vaults shall

be permitted as exposed cable installations.

300.38 Raceways in Wet Locations Above

Grade. New section

300.45 Warning Signs. New section

300.50 Underground Installations

(A)(2) Industrial Establishments. New

section.

ARTICLE 310

Conductors for General Wiring

310.15 Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0-

2000 Volts.

(A) (7) 120/240-Volt, 3-Wire, Single-Phase

Dwelling Services and Feeders. For one-

family dwellings and the individual dwelling

310.15 Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0-2000

Volts.

(A)(2) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than

one ampacity applies for a given circuit length,

the lowest value shall be used.


60


units of two-family and multifamily

dwellings, service and feeder conductors

applied by a single-phase, 120/240-volt

system shall be permitted be sized in

accordance with 310.15(B)(7)(1) through (4).

(1) For a service rated 100 through 400 A,

the service conductors supplying the entire

loads associated with a one-family dwelling,

or the service conductors supplying the

entire load associated with an individual

dwelling unit in a two-family or multifamily

dwelling, shall be permitted to have an

ampacity not less than 83 percent of the

service rating.

(2) For a feeder rated 100 through 400 A, the

feeder conductors supplying the entire load

associated with a one-family dwelling, or the


associated with an individual dwelling, unit

to a two-family or multifamily dwelling, shall

be permitted to have an ampacity not less

than 83 percent of the feeder rating.

(3) In no case shall a feeder for an individual

dwelling unit be required to have an

ampacity greater than that specified in

310.15(B)(7)(1) or (2).

(4) Grounded conductors shall be permitted

to be sized smaller than the ungrounded

conductors, provided that the requirements

of 220.61 and 230.42 for service conductors

or the requirements of 215.2 and 220,61 for

feeder conductors are met.

Exception: Where two When different ampacities

apply to adjacent portions of a circuit, the higher

ampacity shall be permitted to be used if the total

portion(s) of the circuit with the lower capacity

does not exceed the lesser of beyond the point of

transition, a distance equal to 3.0 m (10 ft) or 10

percent of the total circuit length figured at the

higher ampacity, whichever is less.

(A)(7) 120/240-Volt, 3-Wire, Single-Phase

Dwelling Services and Feeders. For one-family

dwellings and the individual dwelling units of two-

family and multifamily dwellings, service and

feeder conductors applied by a single-phase,

120/240-volt system shall be permitted be sized

in accordance with 310.15(B)(7)(1) through (4).

For one-family dwellings and the individual units

of two-family and multifamily dwellings, single-

phase feeder conductors consisting of 2

ungrounded conductors and the neutral

conductor from a 208Y/120 volt system shall be

permitted to be sized in accordance with

310.15(B)(7)(1) through (3).

(1) For a service rated 100 through 400 A, the

service conductors supplying the entire loads


service conductors supplying the entire load

associated with an individual dwelling unit in a

two-family or multifamily dwelling, shall be

permitted to have an ampacity not less than 83

percent of the service rating.


61


individual dwelling units of one family, two-

family, and multifamily dwellings,

conductors, as listed in Table 310.15(B)(7),

shall be permitted as 120/240-volt, 3-wire,

single-phase service-entrance conductors,

service-lateral conductors, and feeder

conductors that serve as the main power

feeder to each dwelling unit and are installed

in raceway or cable with or without an

equipment grounding conductor. For

application of this section, the main power

feeder shall be the feeder between the main

disconnect and the panelboard that supplies,

either by

branch circuits or by feeders, or both, all

loads that are part or associated with the

dwelling unit. The feeder conductors to a

dwelling unit shall not be required to have an

allowable ampacity rating greater than their

service-entrance conductors. The grounded

conductor shall be permitted to be smaller

than the ungrounded conductors, provided

the requirements of 215.2, 220.61, and

230.42 are met.

(2) For a feeder rated 100 through 400 A, the




associated with an individual dwelling, unit to a

two-family or multifamily dwelling, shall be

permitted to have an ampacity not less than 83

percent of the feeder rating.

(3) In no case shall a feeder for an individual

dwelling unit be required to have an ampacity

greater than that specified in 310.15(B)(7)(1) or

(2).

(4) Grounded conductors shall be permitted to be

sized smaller than the ungrounded conductors,

provided that the requirements of 220.61 and

230.42 for service conductors or the

requirements of 215.2 and 220,61 for feeder

conductors are met.

Where correction or adjustment factors are

required by 310.15(B)(2) or (3), they shall be

permitted to be applied to the ampacity

associated with the temperature rating of the

conductor.

ARTICLE 312

Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket

Enclosures

ARTICLE 312

Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket

Enclosures

312.1 Scope. This article covers the installation

and construction specifications of cabinets, cutout


62


boxes, and meter socket enclosures. It does not

apply to equipment operating at over 1000 volts,

except as specifically referenced elsewhere in the

Code.

Table 312.6(A) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at

Terminals and Minimum Width of Wiring

Gutters. Revised.

312.8 Switch and Overcurrent Device. Revised.

ARTICLE 314 Outlet, Device, Pull, and

Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; Fittings;

and Handhole Enclosures

ARTICLE 314 Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction

Boxes; Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Handhole

Enclosures

314.15 Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or

wet locations, boxes, conduit bodies, outer

box hoods, and fittings shall be placed or

equipped so as to prevent moisture from

entering or accumulating within the box,

conduit body, outer box hoods, or fitting.

Boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings installed

in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations. Approved drainage openings not

larger than 5 mm (1.4 in) shall be permitted

to be installed in the field in boxes or conduit

boxes listed for use in damp or wet location.

Fir installation of listed drain fittings, larger

openings are permitted to be installed in the

field in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

314.15 Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet

locations, boxes, conduit bodies, outer box hoods,

and fittings shall be placed or equipped so as to

prevent moisture from entering or accumulating

within the box, conduit body, outer box hoods, or

fitting. Boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in

wet locations. Approved drainage openings not

smaller than 3 mm (1/8 in) and not larger than 5 6

mm (1/4 in) in diameter shall be permitted to be

installed in the field in boxes or conduit boxes

listed for use in damp or wet location. Fir

installation of listed drain fittings, larger openings

are permitted to be installed in the field in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


63


314.16 Number of Conduits in Outlet,

Device, and Junction Boxes, and Conduit

Bodies.

(B) (2) Add- A clamp assembly that

incorporates a cable termination for the

cable conductors shall be listed and marked

for use with specific nonmetallic boxes.

Conductors that originate within the clamp

assembly shall be included in conductor fill

calculations covered in 314.16(B)(1) as

though they entered from outside the box.

The clamp assembly shall not require a fill

allowance, but the volume of the portion of

the assembly that remains within the box

after installation shall be excluded from the

box volume as marked in 314.16(A)(2).

314.16 Number of Conduits in Outlet, Device,

and Junction Boxes, and Conduit Bodies.

(A) Box Volume Calculations. The volume of a

wiring

enclosure (box) shall be the total volume of the

assembled sections and, where used, the space

provided by plaster rings, domed covers,

extension rings, and so forth, that are marked

with their volume or are made from boxes the

dimensions of which are listed in Table 314.16(A).

Where a box is provided with one or more

securely installed barriers, the volume shall be

apportioned to each of the resulting spaces. Each

barrier, if not marked with its volume, shall be

considered to take up 8.2 cm3 (1/2 in3) if metal,

and 16.4 cm3 (1.0 in3) if nonmetallic.

(B) Box Fill Calculations. The volumes in

paragraphs

314.16(B)(1) through (B)(5), as applicable, shall be

added

together. No allowance shall be required for small

fittings such as locknuts and bushings. Each space

within a box, installed with a barrier shall be

calculated separately.

314.17(C) Nonmetallic Boxes and Conduit

Bodies. Nonmetallic boxes and conduit

bodies shall be suitable for the lowest

temperature-rated conductor entering the

box. Where nonmetallic boxes and conduit

bodies are used with messenger support

wiring, open wiring on insulators, or

314.17 Conductors Entering Boxes, Conduit

Bodies, or

Fittings.

(A) Openings to Be Closed. Openings

through which conductors enter shall be

closed in an approved manner adequately

closed.

314.17 Conductors Entering Boxes, Conduit

Bodies, or

Fittings.

(B) Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Where

metal boxes

or conduit bodies are installed with messenger-

supported wiring, open wiring on insulators, or

concealed knob-and- tube wiring, conductors


64


concealed knob-and-tube wiring, the

conductors shall enter the boxes through

individual holes. Where flexible tubing is

used to enclose the conductors, the tubing

shall extend from the last insulated support

to not less than 6 mm (1/4 in.) inside the box

and beyond any cable clamp.

Where nonmetallic-sheathed cable or

multiconductor Type UF cable is used, the

sheath shall extend not less than 6 mm (1/4

in.) inside the box and beyond any cable

clamp. In all instances, all permitted wiring

methods shall be secure to the boxes.

Exception: Where nonmetallic-sheathed

cable or multiconductor Type UF cable is

used with single gang boxes not larger than

a nominal size 57mm x 100 mm (2 ¼ in. x 4

in.) mounted in walls or ceilings, and where

the cable is fastened within 200 mm (8 in.)

of the box measured

along the sheath and the sheath extends

through a cable knockout not less than 6

mm. (1/4 in.) securing the cable to the box

shall not be required. Multiple cables entries

shall be permitted in a single cable knockout

opening.

shall enter through insulating bushings or, in dry

locations, through flexible tubing extending from

the last insulating support to not less than 6 mm

(1⁄4 in.) inside the box and beyond any cable

clamps. Where nonmetallic sheathed cable or

multiconductor Type UF cable is used, the sheath

shall extend not less than 6 mm (1/4 in) inside the

box and beyond any cable clamp. Except as

provided in 300.15(C), the wiring shall be firmly

secured to the box or conduit body. Where

raceway or cable is installed with metal boxes or

conduit bodies, the raceway or cable shall be

secured to such boxes and conduit bodies.

314.20 In Wall or Ceiling Flush-Mounted

Installations. Installations within or behind In

walls or ceilings with a

surface of concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, or other

noncombustible material, boxes employing a

flush-type cover or faceplate shall be made

installed so that the front edge of the box, plaster


65


ring, extension ring, or listed extender will not be

set back of the finished surface more than 6 mm

(1⁄4 in.).

Installations within a surface In walls and ceilings

constructed of wood or other combustible surface

material, boxes, plaster rings, extension rings, or

listed extenders shall extend to be flush with the

finished surface or project therefrom.

314.25 Covers and Canopies. Add- Screws

used for the purpose of attaching covers, or

other equipment, to the box shall be either

machine screws matching the thread gauge

and size that is integral to the box or shall be

in accordance to the box or shall be in

accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

314.28 Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit

Bodies.

(3) Smaller Dimensions. Listed boxes or

listed conduit bodies of dimensions less than

those required in 314.28(A)(1) and (A)(2)

shall be permitted for installations of

combinations of conductors that are less

than the maximum conduit or tubing fill (of

conduits or tubing being used) permitted by

Table 1 of Chapter 9.

Listed conduit bodies of dimensions less than

those required in 314.28(A)(2), and having a

radius of the curve to the centerline not less

than that indicated in Table 2 of Chapter 9

for one-shot and full-shoe benders, shall be

314.28 Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit

Bodies.

(A) Minimum Size. For raceways containing

conductors

of 4 AWG or larger that are required to be

insulated, and for cables containing conductors of

4 AWG or larger, the minimum dimensions of pull

or junction boxes installed in a raceway or cable

run shall comply with 314.28(A)(1) through (A)(3).

Where an enclosure dimension is to be calculated

based on the diameter of entering raceways, the

diameter shall be the metric designator (trade

size) expressed in the units of measurement

employed.


66


permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9, These

conduit bodies shall be marked to show they

have been specifically evaluated in

accordance with this provision.

Where the permitted combinations of

conductors for which the box or conduit

body has been listed are less than the

maximum conduit or tubing fill permitted by

Table 1 of Chapter 9, the box or conduit

body shall be permanently marked with the

maximum number and maximum size of

conductors permitted. provided the box or

conduit body has been listed for, and is

permanently marked with, the maximum

number and maximum size of conductors

permitted.

(3)Smaller Dimensions. Listed boxes or listed

conduit bodies of dimensions less than those

required in 314.28(A)(1) and (A)(2) shall be

permitted for installations of combinations of

conductors that are less than the maximum

conduit or tubing fill (of conduits or tubing being

used) permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9.

Listed conduit bodies of dimensions less than

those required in 314.28(A)(2), and having a

radius of the curve to the centerline not less than

that indicated in Table 2 of Chapter 9 for one-shot

and full-shoe benders, shall be permitted by Table

1 of Chapter 9, These conduit bodies shall be

marked to show they have been specifically

evaluated in accordance with this provision.

Where the permitted combinations of conductors

for which the box or conduit body has been listed

are less than the maximum conduit or tubing fill

permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9, the box or

conduit body shall be permanently marked with

the maximum number and maximum size of

conductors permitted. For other conductor sizes

and combinations, the total cross-sectional area

of the fill shall not exceed the cross-sectional area

of the conductors specified in the marking, based

on the type of conductor identified as part of the

product listing.

(E) Power Distribution Blocks.

(1) Installation. Power distribution blocks

installed in

boxes shall be listed. Power distribution blocks

installed on the line side of the service equipment


67


shall be listed and marked “suitable for use on the

line side of service equipment” or equivalent.

314.70 General.

(A) Pull and Junction Boxes. Where pull and

junction boxes are used on systems over 600

1000 volts, the installation shall comply with

the provisions of Part IV and with the

following general provisions of this article:

(1) Part I, 314.2; 314.3; and 314.4

(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.20; 314.23(A),

(B), or (G);

314.28(B); and 314.29

(3) Part III, 314.40(A) and (C); and 314.41

(B) Conduit Bodies. Where conduit bodies

are used on systems over 600 1000 volts, the

installation shall comply with the provisions

of Part IV and with the following general

provisions of this article:

(1) Part I, 314.4

(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.23(A), (E), or

(G); and

314.29

(3) Part III, 314.40(A); and 314.41


68


(C) Handhole Enclosures. Where handhole

enclosures are used on systems over 600

1000 volts, the installation shall comply with

the provisions of Part IV and with the

following general provisions of this article:

(1) Part I, 314.3; and 314.4

(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.23(G);

314.28(B); 314.29;

and 314.30

ARTICLE 330

Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC

330.6 Listing Requirements. New section.

330.15 Exposed Work. New section.

330.10 Uses Permitted

(11) In wet locations where a corrosion-

resistant jacket is provided over the metallic

covering and any of the following conditions

are met:

a. The metallic covering is impervious to

moisture.


69


b. A moisture-impervious jacket resistant to

moisture is provided under the metal

covering.

c. The insulated conductors under the

metallic covering are listed for use in wet

locations, and a corrosion resistant jacket is

provided over the metallic sheath.

330.30 Securing and Supporting.

(B) Securing. Unless otherwise provided,

cables shall be secured at intervals not

exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). Cables containing four

or fewer conductors sized no larger than 10

AWG shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.)

of every box, cabinet, fitting, or other cable

termination. In vertical installations, fixed

cables with ungrounded conductors 250

kcmil and larger shall be permitted to be

secured at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10

ft).

(D)Unsupported Cables.

(3) Is Type MC of the interlocked armor type

in length not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) from

the last point where it is securely fastened

and is used to connect equipment where

flexibility is necessary to minimize the

transmission of vibration from equipment or


70


to provide flexibility for equipment that

requires movement after installation.

330.112 Insulation.

(A) 600 1000 Volts. Insulated conductors in

sizes 18 AWG and 16 AWG shall be of a type

listed in Table 402.3, with a maximum

operating temperature not less than 90°C

(194°F) and as permitted by 725.49.

Conductors larger than 16 AWG shall be of a

type listed in Table 310.104(A) or of a type

identified for use in Type MC cable.

(B) Over 600 1000 Volts. Insulated

conductors shall be of a type listed in Table

310.104(C) (B) through Table 310.104(E) (C).

ARTICLE 332

Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathe Cable: Type

MI


ARTICLE 334

Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: Type NM,

NMC, and NMS

ARTICLE 334

Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: Type NM, NMC,

and NMS


71



334.40 Boxes and Fittings.

(B) Devices of Insulating Material. Self-

Contained switches, self-contained

receptacles, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable

in interconnector witch, outlet, and tap

devices of insulating material that are listed

shall be permitted to be used without boxes

in exposed cable wiring and for repair wiring

rewiring in existing buildings where the cable

is concealed and fished. Openings in such

devices shall form a close fit around the

outer covering of the cable, and the device

shall fully enclose the part of the cable from

which any part of the covering has been

removed. Where connections to conductors

are by binding-screw terminals, there shall

be available many terminals as conductors.

ARTICLE 333

Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC

ARTICLE 336

Power and Control Tray Cables, Type TC


72



336.10 Uses Permitted. Type TC cable shall be

permitted

to be used as follows:

(1) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits.

(2) In cable trays, including those with

mechanically discontinuous segments up to 300

mm (1 ft).

(3) In raceways.

(4) In outdoor locations supported by a

messenger wire.

(5) For Class 1 circuits as permitted in Parts II and

III of

Article 725.

(6) For non–power-limited fire alarm circuits if

conductors

comply with the requirements of 760.49.

(7) In industrial establishments where the

conditions of

maintenance and supervision ensure that only

qualified

persons service the installation, and where the

cable is

continuously supported and protected against

physical

damage using mechanical protection, such as

struts,

angles, or channels, Type TC tray cable that

complies

with the crush and impact requirements of Type

MC


73


cable and is identified for such use with the

marking

Type TC–ER shall be permitted Between a cable

tray

and the utilization equipment or devices provided

all of the following apply:

(a) The cable is Type TC-ER.

(b) The cable is installed in industrial

establishments where the conditions of


qualified persons service the installation.

(c) The cable is continuously supported and

protected against physical damage using

mechanical protection, such as struts, angles,

or channels.

(d) The cable that complies with the crush and

impact requirements of Type MC cable and is

identified with for such use with the marking

Type TC–ER

(e) The cable shall is secured at intervals not

exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft).

(f) Equipment grounding for the utilization

equipment shall be provided by an

equipment grounding conductor within

the cable. In cables containing conductors

sized 6 AWG or smaller, the equipment

grounding conductor shall must be

provided within the cable or, at the time

of installation, one or more insulated

conductors shall must be permanently

identified as an equipment grounding

conductor in accordance with 250.119(B).


74


Exception: Where not subject to physical damage,

Type

TC-ER shall be permitted to transition between

cable trays and between cable trays and

utilization equipment or devices for a distance not

to exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) without continuous support.

The cable shall be mechanically supported where

exiting the cable tray to ensure that the minimum

bending radius is not exceeded.

(8) Where installed in wet locations, Type TC

cable shall also be resistant to moisture and

corrosive agents.

(9) In one- and two-family dwelling units, Type TC-

ER cable containing both power and control

conductors that is identified for pulling through

structural members shall be permitted. Type TC-

ER cable used as interior wiring shall be installed

per the requirements of Part II of Article 334.

Exception: Where used to connect a generator

and associated equipment having terminals rated

750C (1400F) or higher, the cable shall not be

limited in ampacity by 334.80 or 340.80.

(10) Direct buried, where identified for such use.

ARTICLE 338

Service-Entrance Cable: Types SE and USE

ARTICLE 338

Service-Entrance Cable: Types SE and USE



75


338.10 Uses Permitted.

(B) Branch Circuits or Feeders.

(4) Installation Methods for Branch Circuits

and Feeders.

(b) Exterior Installations. In addition to the

provisions

of this article, service-entrance cable used

for feeders or

branch circuits, where installed as exterior

wiring, shall be installed in accordance with

Part I of Article 225. The cable shall be

supported in accordance with 334.30. Type

USE cable installed as underground feeder

and branch circuit cable shall comply with

Part II of Article 340.

Exception: Single-conductor Type USE and

multi-rated USE conductors shall not be

subject to the ampacity limitations of Part II

of Article 340.


(B) Branch Circuits or Feeders.

(4) Installation Methods for Branch Circuits and

Feeders.

(a) Interior Installations. In addition to the

provisions

of this article, Type SE service-entrance cable

used for interior wiring shall comply with the

installation requirements of Part II of Article 334,

excluding 334.80.

For Type SF cable with ungrounded conductor

sizes 10 AWG and smaller, where installed in

thermal insulation, the ampacity shall be in

accordance with the 60°C (140°F) conductor

temperature rating. The maximum conductor

temperature rating shall be permitted to be used

for ampacity adjustment and correction purposes,

if the final derated ampacity does not exceed that

for a 60°C (140°F) rated conductor.

ARTICLE 340

Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit

Cable: Type UF

ARTICLE 340

Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable:

Type UF


ARTICLE 342


76


Intermediate Metal Conduit: Type IMC

342.14 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable,

dissimilar

metals in contact anywhere in the system shall be

avoided to eliminate the possibility of galvanic

action.

Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be

permitted to be used with galvanized steel IMC

where not subject to severe corrosive influences.

Stainless steel IMC shall only be used with

stainless steel fittings and approved accessories,

outlet boxes, and enclosures.

342.100 Construction. New section.

342.120 Marking. Each length shall be clearly and

durably marked at least every 1.5 m (5 ft) with the

letters IMC. Each length shall be marked as

required in the first sentence of in 110.21(A).

ARTICLE 344


ARTICLE 344


344.14 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable,

dissimilar

metals in contact anywhere in the system shall be

avoided to eliminate the possibility of galvanic

action. Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be

permitted to be used with galvanized steel RMC,

and galvanized steel fittings and enclosures shall

be permitted to be used with aluminum RMC


77


where not subject to severe corrosive influences.

Stainless steel RMC shall only be used with

stainless steel fittings and approved accessories,

outlet boxes, and enclosures.

344.30 Securing and Supporting. Revised.

344.100 Construction. New section. 344.100 Construction.

(1) Steel (ferrous) with or without protective

coatings.

(2) Aluminum (nonferrous).

ARTICLE 348

Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC

ARTICLE 348

Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC


A) Securely Fastened.

Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m

(6 ft) from the last point where the raceway

is securely fastened for connections within an

accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other

equipment. For the purposes of this

exception, listed flexible metal conduit

fittings shall be permitted as a means of

support.


A) Securely Fastened. Add-

Where used, cable ties shall be listed and be

identified for securement and support.


78


ARTICLE 350

Lightweight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type

LFMC

350.42 Couplings and Connectors. Only

fittings listed for use with LFMC shall be

used. Angle connectors shall not be

concealed. Straight LFMC fittings shall be

permitted for direct burial where marked.

ARTICLE 356

Lightweight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit:

Type LFNC

356.30 Securing and Supporting. Type LFNC-

B shall be

securely fastened and supported in

accordance with one of the following:

(1) Where installed in lengths exceeding 1.8

m (6 ft), the

conduit shall be securely fastened at

intervals not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) and

within 300 mm (12 in.) on

each side of every outlet box, junction box,

cabinet, or

fitting.

(2) Securing or supporting of the conduit

shall not be required where it is fished,

356.30 Securing and Supporting. Type LFNC-B

LFNC shall be securely fastened and supported in

accordance with one of the following:

(1) Where installed in lengths exceeding 1.8 m (6

ft), the

conduit shall be securely fastened at intervals not

exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) and within 300 mm (12

in.) on

each side of every outlet box, junction box,

cabinet, or

fitting. Where used, cable ties shall be listed as

suitable for the application and for securing and

supporting.

(2) Securing or supporting of the conduit shall not

be required where it is fished, installed in lengths


79


installed in lengths not exceeding 900 mm (3

ft) at terminals where flexibility is

required, or installed in lengths not

exceeding 1.8 m

(6 ft) from a luminaire terminal connection

for tap conductors to luminaires permitted in

410.117(C).

(3) Horizontal runs of LFNC supported by

openings through framing members at

intervals not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) and

securely fastened within 300 mm (12 in.) of

termination points shall be permitted.

(4) Securing or supporting of LFNC-B shall

not be required

where installed in lengths not exceeding 1.8

m

(6 ft) from the last point where the raceway

is securely fastened for connections within

an accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other

equipment. For the purpose of 356.30, listed

liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit

fittings shall be permitted as a means of

support.

not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) at terminals where

flexibility is

required, or installed in lengths not exceeding 1.8

m

(6 ft) from a luminaire terminal connection for tap

conductors to luminaires permitted in 410.117(C).

(3) Horizontal runs of LFNC LFNC supported by

openings through framing members at intervals

not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) and securely

fastened within 300 mm (12 in.) of

termination points shall be permitted.

(4) Securing or supporting of LFNC-B shall not be

required

where installed in lengths not exceeding 1.8 m

(6 ft) from the last point where the raceway is

securely fastened for connections within an

accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other

equipment. For the purpose of 356.30, listed

liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit fittings

shall be permitted as a means of support.

356.60 Grounding and Bonding. Revised.

ARTICLE 358

Electrical Metallic Tubing Type EMT



80


(A) Exposed and Concealed. The use of EMT shall

be permitted for both exposed and concealed

work for the following:

(1) In concrete, in direct contact with the earth or

in areas subject to severe corrosive influences

where installed in accordance with 358.10(B).

(2) In dry, damp, or wet locations.

(3) In any hazardous (classified) location as

permitted by other articles in this Code.

(B) Corrosive Environments.

(1) Galvanized steel and Stainless steel EMT,

Elbows, and Fittings. New subsection.

(2) Supplementary Protection of Aluminum EMT.

New subsection.

(C) Cinder Fill. New section inserted.

358.12 Uses Not Permitted. EMT shall not be

used under

the following conditions:

(1) Where, during installation or afterward, it will

be subject to severe physical damage.

(2) Where protected from corrosion solely by

enamel.

(3) In cinder concrete or cinder fill where subject

to permanent moisture unless protected on all

sides by a layer of non-cinder concrete at least 50

mm (2 in.) thick or unless the tubing is at least 450

mm (18 in.) under the fill.

(4) In any hazardous (classified) location except as

permitted by other articles in this Code.

(5) (2) For the support of luminaires or other

equipment except conduit bodies no larger than

the largest trade size of the tubing.


81


(6) Where practicable, dissimilar metals in contact

anywhere in the system shall be avoided to

eliminate the

possibility of galvanic action.

Exception: Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall

be permitted to be used with steel EMT where not

subject to severe corrosive influences.


(A) Securely Fastened. EMT shall be securely

fastened in

place at intervals not to exceed least every 3 m

(10 ft). In addition, each EMT run between

termination points shall be securely fastened

within 900 mm (3 ft) of each outlet box, junction

box, device box, cabinet, conduit body, or other

tubing termination.

Exception No. 1: Fastening of unbroken lengths

shall be

permitted to be increased to a distance of 1.5 m (5

ft) where structural members do not readily

permit fastening within 900 mm (3 ft).

Exception No. 2: For concealed work in finished

buildings

or prefinished wall panels where such securing is

impracticable, unbroken lengths (without

coupling) of EMT shall be permitted to be fished.

358.100 Construction. EMT shall be made of one

of the following:

(1) Steel with protective coatings

(2) Aluminum.

(3) Stainless steel


82


Factory-threaded integral couplings shall be

permitted. Where EMT with a threaded integral

coupling is used, threads for both the tubing and

coupling shall be factory-made. The coupling and

EMT threads shall be designed so as to prevent

bending of the tubing at any part of the thread.

ARTICLE 362

Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing: Type ENT


(A) Securely Fastened. ENT shall be securely

fastened at

intervals not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft). In addition,

ENT

shall be securely fastened in place within 900 mm

(3 ft) of each outlet box, device box, junction box,

cabinet, or fitting where it terminates. Where

used, cable ties shall be listed as suitable for the

application and for securing and supporting.

Exception No. 1: Lengths not exceeding a distance

of

1.8 m (6 ft) from a luminaire terminal connection

for tap

connections to lighting luminaires shall be

permitted

without being secured.

Exception No. 2: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6

ft) from the last point where the raceway is

securely fastened for


83


connections within an accessible ceiling to

luminaire(s) or

other equipment.

Exception No. 3: For concealed work in finished

buildings

or prefinished wall panels where such securing is

impracticable,

unbroken lengths (without coupling) of ENT shall

be permitted to be fished.

ARTICLE 368

Busways


(C) Feeder or Branch Circuits. Where a busway is

used

as a feeder, devices or plug-in connections for

tapping off

feeder or branch circuits from the busway shall

contain the overcurrent devices required for the

protection of the feeder or branch circuits. The

plug-in device shall consist of an externally

operable circuit breaker or an externally operable

fusible switch. Where such devices are mounted

out of reach and contain disconnecting means,

suitable means such as ropes, chains, or sticks

shall be provided for operating the disconnecting

means from the floor.

Exception No. 1: As permitted in 240.21.

Exception No. 2: For fixed or semifixed luminaires,

where


84


the branch-circuit overcurrent device is part of the

luminaire cord plug on cord-connected luminaires.

Exception No. 3: Where luminaires without cords

are

plugged directly into the busway and the

overcurrent device is mounted on the luminaire.

Exception No. 4: Where the branch-circuit

overcurrent plug-in device is directly supplying a

readily accessible disconnect, a method of floor

operation shall not be required.

ARTICLE 370 Cablebus ARTICLE 370 Cablebus

370.2 Definition.

Cablebus. An assembly of units or sections

with insulated conductors with having

associated fittings forming a structured

system used to securely fasten or support

conductors and conductor terminations in a

completely enclosed, ventilated protective

metal housing. Cablebus is ordinarily

assembled at the point of installation from

the components furnished or specified by

the manufacturer in accordance with

instructions for the specific job. This

assembly is designed to carry fault current

and to withstand the magnetic forces of such

current.

370.10 Uses Permitted. Revised


85


370.12 Uses not Permitted. New section. 370.12 Uses not Permitted. Cablebus shall not be

permitted to be installed in the following:

(1) In Hoistways

(2) In Hazardous (classified) locations, unless

specifically permitted in Chapter 5 approved for

the use

370.18 Cablebus Installation. New section. 370.18 Cablebus Cellular Concrete Floor

Raceways Installation. New section.

370.20 Conductor Size and Termination.

New section.

370.30 Securing and Support. New section.

370.42 Fittings. New section.

370.60 Grounding. New section.

370.80 Ampacity of Conductors. New

section.

370.120 Marking. New section.

ARTICLE 374 Cellular Metal Floor Raceways

374.2 Definitions.

Cellular Metal Floor Raceway. The hollow

spaces of cellular metal floors, together with


86


suitable fittings, that may be approved as

enclosures enclosed channel for electrical

conductors.

374.11 Connection to Cabinets and

Extensions from Cells.

Connections between raceways and

distribution centers and wall outlets shall be

made by means of liquidtight flexible metal

conduit, flexible metal conduit where not

installed in concrete, rigid metal conduit,

intermediate metal conduit, electrical

metallic tubing, or approved fittings. Where

there are provisions for the termination of

an equipment grounding conductor, rigid

polyvinyl chloride conduit, reinforced

thermosetting resin nonmetallic conduit,

electrical nonmetallic tubing, or liquidtight

flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be

permitted. Where installed in concrete,

liquidtight flexible metal conduit and

liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall

be listed and marked for direct burial.

374.18 Cellular Metal Floor Raceways

Installations. New section.

ARTICLE 376 Metal Wireways


87


376.56 Splices, Taps, and Power Distribution

Blocks.

(B)Power Distribution Blocks.

(1) Installation. Add- Power distribution

blocks installed on the line side of the service

equipment shall be listed for the purpose.

(5) Conductors. New section.

ARTICLE 384 Strut-Type Channel Raceway

384.10 Uses Permitted. The use of strut-type

channel raceways

shall be permitted in the following:

(1) Where exposed.

(2) In dry locations.

(3) In locations subject to corrosive vapors where

protected

by finishes judged suitable approved for the

condition.

(4) Where the voltage is 600 volts or less.

(5) (4) As power poles.

(6) (5) In Class I, Division 2 hazardous (classified)

locations

as permitted in 501.10(B)(3) Chapter 5.

(5)(6) As extensions of unbroken lengths through

walls, partitions, and floors where closure strips

are removable


88


from either side and the portion within the wall,

partition, or floor remains covered.

(8) (7) Ferrous channel raceways and fittings

protected from corrosion solely by enamel shall

be permitted only indoors.

ARTICLE 386 Surface Metal Raceways

386.30 Securing and Supporting. Surface

metal raceways and associated fittings shall

be supported at intervals in accordance with

the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

386.120 Marking. New section.

ARTICLE 388 Surface Nonmetallic Raceways

388.30 Securing and Supporting. Surface

nonmetallic raceways and associated fittings

shall be supported at intervals in accordance

with the manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

388.120 Marking. Add- Each length of

surface metallic raceway shall be clearly and

durably identified as required in the first

sentence of 110.21(A).

ARTICLE 392 Cable Trays ARTICLE 392 Cable Trays


89



(H) Marking. Add- The danger marking(s) or

label(s) shall comply with 110.21(B).

Exception: Where not accessible (as applied

to equipment), in industrial establishments

where the conditions of maintenance and

supervision ensure that only qualified

persons service the installation, cable tray

system warning notices shall be located

where necessary for the installation to

ensure safe maintenance and repair.

392.20 Cable and Conductor Installation.

(A) Multiconductor Cables Rated Operating

at 600 Volts or Less. Multiconductor cables

rated operating at 600 volts or less shall be

permitted to be installed in the same cable

tray.

(B) Cables Rated Operating at Over 600

Volts. Cables operating at rated over 600

volts and those rated operating at 600 volts

or less installed in the same cable tray shall

comply with either of the following:

(1) The cables rated operating at over 600

volts are Type MC.

(2) The cables rated operating at over 600

volts are separated from the cables rated

392.20 Cable and Conductor Installation.

(A) Multiconductor Cables Rated Operating at

600 1000 Volts or Less. Multiconductor cables

operating at 600 1000 volts or less shall be

permitted to be installed in the same cable tray.

(B) Cables Operating at Over 1000 Volts. Cables

operating at over 600 1000 volts and those

operating at 600 1000 volts or less installed in the

same cable tray shall comply with either of the

following:

(1) The cables operating at over 600 1000 volts

are Type MC.

(2) The cables operating at over 600 1000 volts

are separated from the cables operating at 600


90


operating at 600 volts or less by a solid fixed

barrier of a material compatible with the

cable tray.

1000 volts or less by a solid fixed barrier of a

material compatible with the cable tray.

392.22 Number of Conductors or Cables.

(A) Number of Multiconductor Cables, Rated

2000 Volts

or Less, in Cable Trays. The number of

multiconductor

cables, rated 2000 volts or less, permitted in a

single cable tray shall not exceed the

requirements of this section. The conductor sizes

apply to both aluminum and copper conductors.

Where dividers are used, fill calculations shall

apply to each divided section of the cable tray.

ARTICLE 393 Low-Voltage Suspended Ceiling

Power Distribution Systems. New Article.

ARTICLE 399 Outdoor Overhead Conductors

over 1000 Volts. Revised replacing all

references to 600 volts to 1000 volts.

Chapter 4 Equipment for General Use Chapter 4 Equipment for General Use

ARTICLE 400 Flexible Cords and Cables ARTICLE 400 Flexible Cords and Cables

400.4 Types. Flexible cords and flexible

cables shall conform to the description in


91


Table 400.4. The use of flexible cords and

flexible cables other than those in Table

400.4 shall require permission by the

authority having jurisdiction. Types of

flexible cords and flexible cables other than

those listed in the table shall be the subject

of special investigation.

Table 400.4 Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables.

Revised.

Table 400.5(A)(1) Allowable Ampacity for

Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables. Revised.

400.6 Markings. Add- Required markings on

tags, cords, and cables shall also include the

maximum operating temperature of the

flexible cord or cable.


(A) Uses.

(11) Between an existing receptacle outlet

and an inlet, where the inlet provides power

to an additional single receptacle outlet. The

wiring interconnecting the inlet to the single

receptacle outlet shall be a Chapter 3 wiring

method, including the flexible cord and

fitting, shall be a listed assembly specific for

this application.

400.8 400.12 Uses Not Permitted. Unless

specifically permitted in 400.7 400.10, flexible


92


cords and cables, flexible cords, and power supply

cords shall not be used for the following:

(1) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a

structure

(2) Where run through holes in walls, structural

ceilings,

suspended ceilings, dropped ceilings, or floors

(3) Where run through doorways, windows, or

similar

openings

(4) Where attached to building surfaces

Exception to (4): Flexible cord and flexible cable

shall be permitted to be attached to building

surfaces in accordance with the provisions of with

368.56(B).

(5) Where concealed by walls, floors, or ceilings or

located above suspended or dropped ceilings

Exception to (5): Flexible cord and flexible cable

shall be permitted if contained within an

enclosure for use in Other Spaces Used for

Environmental Air as permitted by 300.22(C)(3).

(6) Where installed in raceways, except as

otherwise permitted in this Code

(7) Where subject to physical damage

ARTICLE 404 Switches ARTICLE 404 Switches

404.2 Switch Connections.

(C) Switches Controlling Lighting Loads. New

section.

404.2 Switch Connections

(C) Switches Controlling Lighting Loads. The

grounded circuit conductor for the controlled


93


lighting circuit shall be installed provided at the

location where switches control lighting loads,

that are supplied by a grounded general-purpose

branch circuit serving bathrooms, hallways,

stairways, or rooms suitable for human habitation

or occupancy as defined in the applicable building

code. Where multiple switch locations control the

same lighting load such that the entire floor area

of the room or space is visible from the single or

combined switch locations, the grounded circuit

conductor shall only be required at one location,

A grounded conductor shall not be required to be

installed at lighting switch locations under any of

the following conditions for other than the

following:

(1) Where conductors enter the box enclosing the

switch through a raceway, provided that the

raceway is large enough for all contained

conductors, including a grounded conductor.

(2) Where the box enclosing the switch is

accessible for the installation of an additional or

replacement cable without removing finish

materials.

(3) Where snap switches with integral enclosures

comply with 300.15(E).

(4) Where a switch does not serve a habitable

room or bathroom


94


(5) Where multiple switch locations control the

same lighting load such that the entire floor area

of the room or space is visible from the single or

combined switch locations.

(6) (4) Where lighting in the area is controlled by

automatic means.

(7) (5) Where a switch controls a receptacle load.

The grounded conductor shall be extended to any

switch location as necessary and shall be

connected to switching devices that require line-

to-neutral voltage to operate the electronics of

the switch in the standby mode and shall meet

the requirements of 404.22.

Exception: The connection requirement shall

become effective on January 1, 2020. It shall not

apply to replacement or retrofit switches installed

prior to local adoption of 404.2(C) and where the

grounded conductor cannot be extended without

removing finish materials. The number of

electronic control switches on a branch circuit

shall not exceed five, and the number connected

to any feeder on the load side of a system or main

bonding jumper shall not exceed 25. For the

purpose of this exception, a neutral busbar, in

compliance with 200.2(B) and to which a main or

system bonding jumper is connected shall not

limit as to the number of electronic lighting

control switches connected.


95


404.10 Mounting of Snap Switches.

(B) Box Mounted. Add- Screws used for the

purpose of attaching snap switch to a box

shall be of the type provided with a listed

snap switch, or shall be machine screws

having 32 threads per inch or part of listed

assemblies or systems, in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions.

404.16 Knife Switches Rated 600 to 1000

Volt Knife Switches. Auxiliary contacts of a

renewable or quick-break type or the

equivalent shall be provided on all knife

switches rated 600 to 1000 volts and

designed for use in breaking current over

200 amperes.

404.22 Electronic Lighting Control Switches. Add-

Exception: Electronic lighting control switches that

introduce current on the equipment grounding

conductor shall be permitted for applications

covered by 404.2(C), Exception. Electronic lighting

control switches that introduce current on the

equipment grounding conductor shall be listed

and marked for use in replacement or retrofit

applications only.

ARTICLE 406 Receptacles, Cord Connectors,

and Attachment Plugs (Caps)

ARTICLE 406 Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and

Attachment Plugs (Caps)


96


406.3 Receptacle Rating and Type. Add-

(E) Controlled Receptacle Marking. New

section.

406.3 Receptacle Rating and Type.

(E) Controlled Receptacle Marking. All nonlocking

type, 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles

that are controlled by an automatic control

device, or that incorporate control features that

remove power from the receptacle for the

purpose of energy management or building

automation, shall be permanently marked with

the symbol shown in Figure 406.4(E) and the word

“controlled”.

For receptacles controlled by an automatic

control device, the marking shall be located on

the receptacle face and visible after installation.

In both cases where a multiple receptacle device

is used, the required marking of the word

“controlled” and symbol shall denote which

contact device(s) are controlled.

Exception: The marking is shall not be required for

receptacles controlled by a wall switch that

provide the required room lighting outlets as

permitted by 210.70.

(F) Receptacles with USB Charger. New section.

406.4 General Installation Requirements.

(B) To Be Grounded. Receptacles and cord

connectors

that have equipment grounding conductor

contacts shall


97


have those contacts connected to an equipment

grounding conductor.

Exception No. 1: Receptacles mounted on portable

and

vehicle-mounted generator sets and generators in


Exception No. 2: Replacement receptacles as

permitted by

406.4(D).

(D) Replacements. Replacement of receptacles

shall comply with 406.4(D)(1) through (D)(6), as

applicable.

(1) Grounding-Type Receptacles. Where a

grounding

means exists in the receptacle enclosure or an

equipment grounding conductor is installed in

accordance with 250.130(C), grounding-type

receptacles shall be used and shall be connected

to the equipment grounding conductor in

accordance with 406.4(C) or 250.130(C).

(2) Non–Grounding-Type Receptacles. Where

attachment to an equipment grounding

conductor does not exist in the receptacle

enclosure, the installation shall comply with

(D)(2)(a), (D)(2)(b), or (D)(2)(c).

(a) A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be

permitted to be replaced with another non–

grounding-type receptacle(s).

(b) A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be

permitted to be replaced with a ground-fault

circuit interrupter type of receptacle(s). These

receptacles or their coverplates shall be marked


98


“No Equipment Ground.” An equipment

grounding conductor shall not be connected from

the ground-fault circuit interrupter-type

receptacle to any outlet supplied from the

ground-fault circuit-interrupter receptacle.

(c) A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be

permitted to be replaced with a grounding-type

receptacle(s) where supplied through a ground-

fault circuit interrupter. Where grounding-type

receptacles are Grounding-type receptacles

supplied through the ground-fault circuit

interrupter, grounding-type receptacles or their

cover plates shall be marked “GFCI Protected”

and “No Equipment Ground,” visible after

installation. An equipment grounding conductor

shall not be connected between the grounding

type receptacles.

(3) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. Ground-

fault

circuit-interrupter protected receptacles shall be

provided where replacements are made at

receptacle outlets that are required to be so

protected elsewhere in this Code.

Exception: Where replacement of the receptacle

type is impracticable, such as where the outlet box

size will not permit the installation of the GFCI

receptacle shall be permitted to be replaced with

a new receptacle of the existing type, where GFCI

protection is provided and the receptacle is

marked “GFCI Protected” and “No Equipment

Ground,” in accordance with 406.4(D)(2)(a), (b), or

(c), applicable.


99


(4) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection.

Where a

receptacle outlet is located in any areas specified

in 210.12(A) or (B), supplied by a branch circuit

that requires arc-fault circuit interrupter

protection as specified elsewhere in this Code, a

replacement receptacle at this outlet shall be one

of the following:

(1) A listed outlet branch circuit type arc-fault

circuit interrupter receptacle

(2) A receptacle protected by a listed outlet

branch circuit type arc-fault circuit interrupter

type receptacle

(3) A receptacle protected by a listed combination

type

arc-fault circuit interrupter type circuit breaker

This requirement becomes effective January 1,

2014.

Exception No. 1: Arc-fault circuit-interrupter

protection shall not be required where all of the

following apply:

(1) The replacement complies with

406.4(D)(2)(b).

(2) It is impracticable to provide an equipment

grounding conductor as provided by

250.130(C).

(3) A listed combination type arc-fault circuit-

interrupter circuit breaker is not

commercially available.

(4) GFCI/AFCI dual function receptacles are

not commercially available.


100


Exception No. 2: Section 210.12(B), Exception shall

not apply to replacement of receptacles.

(5) Tamper-Resistant Receptacles. Listed tamper-

resistant receptacles shall be provided where

replacements are made at receptacle outlets that

are required to be tamper-resistant elsewhere in

this Code, except where a non-grounding

receptacle is replaced with another non-

grounding receptacle.

406.5 Receptacle Mounting. Receptacles

shall be mounted in identified boxes or

assemblies. The designed for the purpose,

and such boxes or assemblies shall be

securely fastened in place unless otherwise

permitted elsewhere in this Code. Screws

used for the purpose of attaching

receptacles to a box shall be of the type

provided with a listed receptacle, or shall be

machine screws having 32 threads per inch

or part of listed assemblies or systems, in


instructions.

(E) Receptacles in Countertops and Similar

Work Surfaces in Dwelling Units.

Receptacles, unless listed as receptacle

assemblies for countertop applications, shall

not be installed in a face-up position in

countertops or similar work surfaces. Where

receptacle assemblies for countertop

applications are required to provide ground-

fault circuit-interrupter protection for

personnel in accordance with 210.8, such

406.5 Receptacle Mounting. Receptacles shall be

mounted in identified boxes or assemblies. The

boxes or assemblies shall be securely fastened in

place unless otherwise permitted elsewhere in

this Code. Screws used for the purpose of

attaching receptacles to a box shall be of the type

provided with a listed receptacle, or shall be

machine screws having 32 threads per inch or

part of listed assemblies or systems, in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

(E) Receptacles in Countertops and Similar Work

Surfaces. Receptacle assemblies for installation in

countertop surfaces shall be listed for countertop

applications. Receptacles, unless listed as

receptacle assemblies for countertop

applications, shall not be installed in a face-up

position in countertops or similar work surfaces.

Where receptacle assemblies for countertop

applications are required to provide ground-fault

circuit-interrupter protection for personnel in

accordance with 210.8, such assemblies shall be

permitted to be listed as GFCI receptacle

assemblies for countertop applications.


101


assemblies shall be permitted to be listed as

GFCI receptacle assemblies for countertop

applications.

(F) Receptacles in Seating Areas and Other

Similar Surfaces. In seating areas or similar

surfaces, receptacles shall not be installed in

a face-up position unless the receptacle is

any of the following:

(1) Part of an assembly listed as a furniture

power distribution unit, if cord-and-plug-

connected

(2) Part of an assembly listed either as

household furnishings or as commercial

furnishings

(3) Listed either as a receptacle assembly for

countertop applications or as a GFCI

receptacle assembly for countertop

applications.

(4) Installed in a listed floor box

(F) (E) Exposed Terminals. Receptacles shall

be enclosed so that live wiring terminals are

not exposed to contact.

(G) (H) Voltage Between Adjacent Devices.

A receptacle shall not be grouped or ganged

in enclosures with other receptacles, snap

switches, or similar devices, unless they are

arranged so that the voltage between

adjacent devices does not exceed 300 volts,

or unless they are installed in enclosures

equipped with identified, securely installed

barriers between adjacent devices.

(F) Receptacles in Work Surfaces. New section

inserted.

(G) Receptacle Orientation. New section inserted.

(F) (H) Receptacles in Seating Areas and Other

Similar Surfaces. In seating areas or similar

surfaces, receptacles shall not be installed in a

face-up position unless the receptacle is any of

the following:

(1) Part of an assembly listed as a furniture power

distribution unit, if cord-and-plug-connected

(2) Part of an assembly listed either as household

furnishings or as commercial furnishings

(3) Listed either as a receptacle assembly for

countertop applications or as a GFCI receptacle

assembly for countertop applications.

(4) Installed in a listed floor box

(E) (I) Exposed Terminals. Receptacles shall be

enclosed so that live wiring terminals are not

exposed to contact.

(H) (J) Voltage Between Adjacent Devices. A

receptacle shall not be grouped or ganged in

enclosures with other receptacles, snap switches,

or similar devices, unless they are arranged so

that the voltage between adjacent devices does

not exceed 300 volts, or unless they are installed

in enclosures equipped with identified, securely

installed barriers between adjacent devices.

406.6 Receptacle Faceplates (Cover Plates).


102


(D) Receptacle Faceplate (Cover Plates) with

Integral Night and/or USB Charger. New

subsection.

406.9 Receptacles in Damp or Wet

Locations.

(B) Wet Locations.

(1) 15- and 20-Ampere Receptacles in a Wet

Location.

15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt

receptacles installed in a wet location shall

have an enclosure that is weatherproof

whether or not the attachment plug cap is

inserted. An For other than one- or two-

family dwellings, an outlet box hood installed

for this purpose shall be listed and where

installed on an enclosure supported from

grade as described in 314.23(B) or as

described in 314.23(F) shall be identified as

“extra-duty.”

All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt

nonlocking-type

receptacles shall be listed weather-resistant

type.

Exception: 15- and 20-ampere, 125- through

250-volt receptacles installed in a wet

location and subject to routine high-pressure

spray washing shall be permitted to have an

enclosure that is weatherproof when the

attachment plug is removed.

406.9 Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations.

(B) Wet Locations.

(1) 15- and 20-Ampere Receptacles in a Wet

Location.

15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt receptacles

installed in a wet location shall have an enclosure

that is weatherproof whether or not the

attachment plug cap is inserted. An outlet box

hood installed for this purpose shall be listed and

shall be identified as “extra-duty.” Other listed

products, enclosures, or assemblies providing

weatherproof protection that do not utilize outlet

box hood need not be marked “extra duty.”


nonlocking-type receptacles shall be listed

weather-resistant type.

Exception: 15- and 20-ampere, 125- through 250-

volt receptacles installed in a wet location and

subject to routine high-pressure spray washing

shall be permitted to have an enclosure that is

weatherproof when the attachment plug is

removed.

All 15- and 20-ampere 125- and 250-volt

nonlocking-type receptacles shall be listed and so

identified as the weather-resistant type.

406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in

Dwelling Units.

406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling

Units.


103


Tamper-resistant receptacles shall be

installed as specified in 406.12(A) through

(C).

(A) Dwelling Unit. In all areas specified in

210.52, all nonlocking-type 125-volt,

15- and 20-ampere receptacles shall

be listed tamper-resistant

receptacles.

(B) Guest Rooms and Guest Suites of

Hotel and Motels. All areas specified

in 210.52, all nonlocking-type 125-

volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles

shall be listed tamper-resistant

receptacles.

(C) Chile Care Facilities. In all child care

facilities, all nonlocking-type 125-volt,

15- and 20-ampere receptacles shall

be listed tamper-resistant

receptacles.

Exception to (A), (B), and (C): Receptacles in

the following locations shall not be required

to be tamper-resistant:

(1) Receptacles located more than 1.7 m

(51⁄2 E) above the floor.

(2) Receptacles that are part of a luminaire

or appliance.

(3) A single receptacle or a duplex receptacle

for two appliances located within dedicated

space for each appliance that, in normal use,

is not easily moved from one place to

another and that is cord-and-plug connected


nonlocking receptacles in the areas Tamper-

resistant receptacles shall be installed as specified

in 406.12(A) through (C). 406.12(1) through (7)

shall be listed tamper-resistant receptacles.

(1) Dwelling units in all areas specified

406.12(1) through in 210.52 and 550.13

(2) Guest rooms and guest suites of hotels

and motels

(3) Child Care facilities

(4) Preschools and elementary education

facilities

(5) Business offices, corridors, waiting rooms

and the like in clinics, medical and dental

offices and outpatient facilities.

(6) Subject of assembly occupancies described

in 518.2 to include places of waiting

transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks,

and auditoriums

(7) Dormitories

(A) Dwelling Unit. In all areas specified in

210.52, all nonlocking-type 125-volt, 15-

and 20-ampere receptacles shall be listed

tamper-resistant receptacles.

(B) Guest Rooms and Guest Suites of Hotel

and Motels. All areas specified in 210.52,

all nonlocking-type 125-volt, 15- and 20-

ampere receptacles shall be listed tamper-

resistant receptacles.

(C) Chile Care Facilities. In all child care

facilities, all nonlocking-type 125-volt, 15-


104


in accordance with 400.7(A)(6), (A)(7), or

(A)(8).

(4) Nongrounding receptacles used for

replacements as

permitted in 406.4(D)(2)(a).

and 20-ampere receptacles shall be listed

tamper-resistant receptacles.

Exception to (A), (B), and (C): Receptacles in the

following locations shall not be required to be

tamper-resistant:

(1) Receptacles located more than 1.7 m (51⁄2 E)

above the floor.

(2) Receptacles that are part of a luminaire or

appliance.

(3) A single receptacle or a duplex receptacle for

two appliances located within dedicated space for

each appliance that, in normal use, is not easily

moved from one place to another and that is cord-

and-plug connected

in accordance with 400.7(A)(6), (A)(7), or (A)(8).

(4) Nongrounding receptacles used for

replacements as

permitted in 406.4(D)(2)(a).

406.15 Dimmer-Controlled Receptacles.

New section.

ARTICLE 408 Switchboards, Switchgear, and

Panelboards

ARTICLE 408 Switchboards, Switchgear, and

Panelboards

408.1 Scope. This article covers

switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards.

It does not apply to equipment operating at

over 600 1000 volts, except as specifically

referenced elsewhere in the Code.


105


408.3 Support and Arrangement of Busbars

and Conductors.

(E) Phase Bus Arrangement. New section.

408.3 Support and Arrangement of Busbars and

Conductors

(A)(2) Service Panelboards, Switchboards and

Switchgear. Add-

Exception: This requirement shall not apply to

service panelboards with provisions for more than

one service disconnect within a single enclosure

as permitted in 408.36, Exception 1, 2, and 3.

408.4 Field Identification Required

(B) Source of Supply. All switchboards,

switchgear, and panelboards supplied by a

feeder(s) in other than one- or two-family

dwellings shall be marked to indicate each

device or equipment where the power

originates.

408.4 Field Identification Required

(B) Source of Supply. All switchboards,

switchgear, and panelboards supplied by a

feeder(s) in other than one- or two-family

dwellings shall be permanently marked to

indicate each device or equipment where the

power originates. The label shall be permanently

affixed, of sufficient durability to withstand the

environment involved, and not handwritten.

408.55 Wire-Bending Space Within an

Enclosure Containing a Panelboard. Revised.

ARTICLE 409 Industrial Control Panels

409.22 Short-Circuit Current Rating.


106


(A) Installation. An industrial control panel shall

not be installed where the available short-circuit

fault current exceeds its short-circuit current

rating as marked in accordance with 409.110(4).

(B) Documentation. If an industrial control panel

Is required to be marked with a short-circuit

current rating in accordance with 409.110(4), the

available short-circuit current at the industrial

control panel ad the date the short-circuit current

calculation was performed shall be documented

and made available to those to inspect the

installation.

409.110 Marking. Revise-

(3) Industrial control panels supplied by more

than one electrical power source where such that

more than one disconnecting means is required

to disconnect all circuits 50-volts or more power

within the control panel shall be marked to

indicate that more than one disconnect means is

required to de-energize the equipment. The

location of the means necessary to disconnect all

circuits 50-volts or more shall be documented and

available.

ARTICLE 410 Luminaires, Lampholders, and

Lamps

ARTICLE 410 Luminaires, Lampholders, and

Lamps


107


410.10 Luminaires in Specific Locations.

Add-

(F) Luminaires Installed in or Under Roof

Decking. New section.

410.23 Covering of Combustible Material at

Outlet

Boxes. Any combustible wall or ceiling finish

exposed between the edge of a luminaire

canopy or pan and an outlet box having a

surface area of 1160 mm2 (180 in2) or more

shall be covered with noncombustible

material.

410.62 Cord-Connected Lampholders and

Luminaires

(C) Electric-Discharge and LED Luminaires.

(1) Cord-Connected Installation. A luminaire or a

listed

Assembly in compliance with any of the

conditions in (a) through (c) shall be permitted to

be cord connected provided the luminaire is

located directly below the outlet or busway, the

cord is not subject to strain or physical damage,

and the cord is visible over its entire length except

at termination. if the

following conditions apply:

(a) A luminaire shall be permitted to be

connected with a cord terminating in a


108


grounding-type attachment plug or

busway plug.

(b) A luminaire assembly equipped with a

strain relief and canopy shall be permitted

to include a section of raceway not over

150 mm (6 in) in length and intended to

facilitate the connection to an outlet box

mounted above a suspended ceiling.

(c) Listed luminaires connected using listed

assemblies that incorporate manufactured

wiring system connectors in accordance

(1) The luminaire is located directly below the

outlet or

busway.

(2) The flexible cord meets all the following:

a. Is visible for its entire length outside the

luminaire

b. Is not subject to strain or physical damage

c. Is terminated in a grounding-type attachment

plug

cap or busway plug, or is a part of a listed

assembly

incorporating a manufactured wiring system

connector

in accordance with 604.6(C) shall be permitted to

be cord connected., or has a luminaire assembly

with a strain relief and canopy having a maximum

152 mm (6 in.) long section of raceway for

attachment to an outlet box above a suspended

ceiling

410.151 Installation.


109


(B) Connected Load. Add-

The load calculation in 220.43(B) shall not be

required to limit the length of track on a

single branch circuit, and it shall not be

required to limit the number of luminaires

on a single track.

ARTICLE 411 Lighting Systems, Operating at

30 Volts or Less and Lighting Equipment

Connected to Class 2 Power Sources.

ARTICLE 411 Lighting Systems, Operating at 30

Volts or Less and Lighting Equipment Connected

to Class 2 Power Sources Low-Voltage Lighting.

411.1 Scope. This article covers lighting

systems operating at 30 volts or less and

their associated components. This article

also covers lighting equipment connected to

a Class 2 power source.

411.1 Scope. This article covers lighting systems

and their associated components operating at not

more than 30 volts ac or 60 volts dc. Where wet

contact is likely to occur, the limts are 15 volts ac

or 30 volts dc. or less and their associated

components. This article also covers lighting

equipment connected to a Class 2 power source.

411.3 Low-Voltage Lighting Systems.

(A) General. Lighting systems operating at 30

volts or less shall consist of an isolating

power supply, low-voltage luminaires, and

associated equipment that are all identified

for the use. The output circuits of the power

supply shall be rated for25 amperes and 30

volts (42.4 volts peak) maximum under all

load conditions.

411.3 Low-Voltage Lighting Systems. Low voltage

lighting systems shall

(A) General. Lighting systems operating at 30

volts or less shall consist of an isolating power

supply, low-voltage luminaires, and associated

equipment that are all identified for the use. The

output circuits of the power supply shall be rated

for25 amperes maximum and 30 volts (42.4 volts

peak) maximum under all load conditions.


110


(B) Class 2. Listed Class 2 lighting equipment

shall be rated in conformance with Chapter

9, Table II(A) or Table II(B).

(B) Class 2. Listed Class 2 lighting equipment shall

be rated in conformance with Chapter 9, Table

II(A) or Table II(B).

411.3 411.4 Listing Required. Add- Class 2

power sources and lighting equipment

connected to Class2 power sources shall be

listed.

411.4 Listing Required. Lighting systems

operating at 30 volts or less shall comply with

411.4(A) or 411.4(B). Class 2 power sources and

lighting equipment connected to Class 2 power

sources shall be listed.

(A) Listed System. Low voltage lighting systems

Lighting systems operating at 30 volts or less shall

be listed as a complete system. The luminaires,

power supply, and luminaire fittings (including the

exposed bare conductors) of an exposed bare

conductor lighting system shall comply with

411.4(A) or 411.4(B) be listed for the use as part

of the same identified lighting system.

(B) Assembly of Listed Parts. A lighting system

assembled from the following listed parts shall be

permitted:

(1) Low-voltage luminaires

(2) Low-voltage luminaire Power supply

(3) Low-voltage luminaire fittings

(4) Cord (secondary circuit) for which the

luminaires and

power supply are listed for use

(5) (4) Suitably rated cord, cable, Cable,

conductors in conduit, or other fixed Chapter 3

wiring method for the secondary circuit

The luminaires, power supply, and luminaire

fittings


111


(including the exposed bare conductors) of an

exposed bare conductor lighting system shall be

listed for use as part of the same identified

lighting system.

ARTICLE 422 Appliances ARTICLE 422 Appliances

422.5 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter

(GFCI) Protection. New section.

422.5 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI)

Protection for Personnel.

(A) General. Appliances identified in 422.5(A)(1)

through (5) rated 250 volts or less and 60

amperes or less, single- or 3-phase, shall be

provided with GFCI protection for personnel.

Multiple GFCI protective devices shall be

permitted but shall not be required.

(1) Automotive vacuum machines provided for

public use.

(2) Drinking water coolers.

(3) High-pressure spray washing machines- cord-

nd-plug connected.

(4) Tire inflation machines provided for public use.

(5) Vending machines.

(B) Types. New subsection.


112


The device providing GFCI protection required in

this article shall be readily accessible.

422.6 Listing Required. New section.

422.10 Branch-Circuit Rating

(F)(3) Water Heaters and Steam Boilers.

Resistance-type Water heaters and steam boilers

employing resistance-type immersion electric

heating elements contained in an ASME-rated and

stamped vessel or listed instantaneous water

heaters shall be permitted to be subdivided into

circuits not exceeding 120 amperes and protected

at not more than 150 amperes as follows:

(1) Where contained in ASME-rated and stamped

vessels.

(2) Where included in listed instantaneous water

heaters.

(3) Where installed in low-pressure water heater

tanks od open-outlet water heater vessels.


(F) Electric Heating Appliances Employing

Resistance-Type Heating Elements Rates

More Than 48 Amperes.

(3) Water Heaters and Steam Boilers.

Resistance-type immersion electric heating


113


elements Water heaters and steam boilers

employing resistance-type immersion

electric heating elements contained in an

ASME-rated and stamped vessel or listed

instantaneous water heaters shall be

permitted to be subdivided into circuits not

exceeding 120 amperes and protected at not

more than 150 amperes as follows:

(1) Where contained in ASME-rated and

stamped vessels

(2) Where included in listed

instantaneous water heaters

(3) Where installed in low-pressure

water heater tanks or open-outlet

water heater vessels

422.18 Support of Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle)

Fans.

Ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans shall be

supported independently of an outlet box or by


(1) A listed outlet box or listed outlet box

systems identified for the use and installed

in accordance with 314.27(C).

(2) A listed outlet box system, a listed locking

support and mounting receptacle, and a

compatible factory installed attachment

fitting designed for support, identified for

the use, and installed in accordance with

314.27(E).


Outlet Boxes. New section inserted.


Outlet Boxes. Any combustible ceiling finish that


114


is exposed between the edge of a ceiling-

suspended (paddle) fan canopy or pan and an

outlet box and that has a surface area of 1160

mm 2 (180 in2) or more shall be covered with

noncombustible material.

422.23 Tire Inflation and Automotive

Vacuum Machines. New section inserted.

422.30 General. A means shall be provided to

simultaneously disconnect each appliance from all

ungrounded conductors in accordance with the

following sections of Part III. If an appliance is

supplied by more than one branch-circuit or

feeder, these disconnecting means shall be

grouped and identified as being the multiple

disconnecting means for the appliance. Each

disconnecting means shall simultaneously

disconnect all underground conductors that it

controls.

422.31 Disconnection of Permanently

Connected Appliances.

(C) Motor-Operated Appliances Rated over

½ Horsepower. New section.

422.31 Disconnection of Permanently Connected

Appliances.

(A) Rated at Not over 300 Volt-Amperes or 1⁄8

Horsepower.

For permanently connected appliances rated at

not

over 300 volt-amperes or 1⁄8 hp, the branch-

circuit overcurrent device shall be permitted to

serve as the disconnecting means where the

switch or circuit breaker is within sight from the

appliance or is lockable n accordance with 110.25.

(C) Motor-Operated Appliances Rated over 1⁄8

Horsepower. The disconnecting means shall


115


comply with 430.109 and 430.110. For

permanently connected motor-operated

appliances with motors, rated over 1/8 hp, the

disconnecting means shall be within sight from

the appliance or be capable of being locked in the

open position in compliance with 110.25. meet

422.31(C)(1) or (2).

(1) The branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker

shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting

means where the switch or circuit breaker is

within sight from the appliance.

(2) The disconnecting means shall be installed

within sight of the appliance.

Exception: If an appliance of more than 1⁄8 hp is

provided

with a unit switch that complies with 422.34(A),

(B), (C), or (D), the switch or circuit breaker serving

as the other disconnecting means shall be

permitted to be out of sight from the appliance.

422.33 Disconnection of Cord-and-Plug-

Connected

or Attachment Fitting-Connected Appliances.

(A) Separable Connector or an Attachment Plug

(or Attachment Fitting) and Receptacle. For cord-

and-plug-(or attachment fitting-)connected

appliances, an accessible separable connector or

an accessible plug (or attachment fitting) and

receptacle combination shall be permitted to

serve as the disconnecting means. Where the

separable connector or plug and receptacle are

not accessible, cord-and-plug-connected or

attachment fitting-and-plug-connected appliances


116


shall be provided with disconnecting means in


(B) Connection at the Rear Base of a Range. For

cord-and-plug-connected household electric

ranges, an attachment plug and receptacle

connection at the rear base of a range, accessible,

if it is accessible from the front by removal of a

drawer, shall meet be considered as meeting the

intent of 422.33(A).

422.51 Vending Machines. New section.

ARTICLE 424 Fixed Electric Space-Heating

Equipment

ARTICLE 424 Fixed Electric Space-Heating

Equipment

424.19 Disconnecting Means. Means shall

be provided to

simultaneously disconnect the heater, motor

controller(s), and supplementary overcurrent

protective device(s) of all fixed electric

space-heating equipment from all

ungrounded conductors. Where heating

equipment is supplied by more than one

source, feeder, or branch circuit, the

disconnecting means shall be grouped and

marked. The disconnecting means specified

in 424.19(A) and (B) shall have an ampere

rating not less than 125 percent of the total

load of the motors and the heaters, and shall

be lockable in accordance with 110.25. The

provision for locking or adding a lock to the

disconnecting means shall be installed on or

424.19 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be

provided to

simultaneously disconnect the heater, motor

controller(s), and supplementary overcurrent

protective device(s) of all fixed electric space-

heating equipment from all ungrounded

conductors. Where heating equipment is supplied

by more than one source, feeder, or branch

circuit, the disconnecting means shall be grouped

and identified as having multiple disconnecting

means. Each disconnecting means shall

simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded

conductors that it controls marked. The

disconnecting means specified in 424.19(A) and

(B) shall have an ampere rating not less than 125

percent of the total load of the motors and the


117


at the switch or circuit breaker used as the

disconnecting means and shall remain in

place with or without the lock installed.

(A) Heating Equipment with Supplementary

Overcurrent

Protection. The disconnecting means for

fixed electric

space-heating equipment with

supplementary overcurrent protection shall

be within sight from the supplementary

overcurrent protective device(s), on the

supply side of these devices, if fuses, and, in

addition, shall comply with either

424.19(A)(1) or (A)(2).

(1) Heater Containing No Motor Rated over

1⁄8 Horsepower. The above disconnecting

means specified in or unit switches

complying with 424.19(C) shall be permitted

to serve as the required disconnecting

means for both the motor controller(s) and

heater under either of the following

conditions:

(1) The disconnecting means provided is also

within sight

from the motor controller(s) and the heater.

(2) The disconnecting means is lockable in

accordance with 110.25 provided is capable

of being

locked in the open (off) position.

(2) Heater Containing a Motor(s) Rated over

1⁄8 Horsepower. The above disconnecting

means shall be permitted to serve as the

heaters, and shall be lockable in accordance with

110.25.


118


required disconnecting means for both the

motor controller(s) and heater under either

of the following conditions:

(1) Where the disconnecting means is in

sight from the

motor controller(s) and the heater and

complies with

Part IX of Article 430.

(2) Where a motor(s) of more than 1⁄8 hp

and the heater are provided with a single

unit switch that complies with

422.34(A), (B), (C), or (D), the disconnecting

means

shall be permitted to be out of sight from the

motor

controller.

(B) Heating Equipment Without

Supplementary Overcurrent Protection.

(1) Without Motor or with Motor Not over

1⁄8 Horsepower. For fixed electric space-

heating equipment without a motor rated

over 1⁄8 hp, the branch-circuit switch or

circuit breaker shall be permitted to serve as

the disconnecting means where the switch

or circuit breaker is within sight from the

heater or is lockable in accordance with

110.25 capable of being locked in the open

(off) position.

(2) Over 1⁄8 Horsepower. For motor-driven

electric space heating equipment with a

motor rated over 1⁄8 hp, a disconnecPng

means shall be located within sight from the


119


motor controller or shall be permitted to

comply with the requirements in

424.19(A)(2).

(C) Unit Switch(es) as Disconnecting Means.

A unit

switch(es) with a marked “off” position that

is part of a

fixed heater and disconnects all ungrounded

conductors

shall be permitted as the disconnecting

means required

by this article where other means for

disconnection are

provided in the types of occupancies in

424.19(C)(1)

through (C)(4).

(1) Multifamily Dwellings. In multifamily

dwellings, the

other disconnecting means shall be within

the dwelling

unit, or on the same floor as the dwelling

unit in which the fixed heater is installed,

and shall also be permitted to control lamps

and appliances.

(2) Two-Family Dwellings. In two-family

dwellings, the

other disconnecting means shall be

permitted either inside or outside of the

dwelling unit in which the fixed heater is

installed. In this case, an individual switch or

circuit breaker for the dwelling unit shall be


120


permitted and shall also be permitted to

control lamps and appliances.

(3) One-Family Dwellings. In one-family

dwellings, the service disconnecting means

shall be permitted to be the other

disconnecting means.

(4) Other Occupancies. In other occupancies,

the branch circuit switch or circuit breaker,

where readily accessible

for servicing of the fixed heater, shall be

permitted as the other disconnecting means.

424.34 Heating Cable Construction. Heating

cables shall

be furnished complete with Factory-assembled

nonheating leads of heating cables, if any, shall be

at least 2.1 m (7 ft) in length.

424.38 Area Restrictions.

(A) Shall Not Extend Extending Beyond the Room

or Area. Heating cables shall be permitted not

extend beyond the room or area in which they

originate.

(B) Uses Prohibited Not Permitted. Heating

cables shall not be installed in the following as

follows:

(1) In closets, other than as noted in 424.38(C)

(2) Over the top of walls where the wall intersects

the ceiling

(3) Over partitions that extend to the ceiling,

unless they

are isolated single runs of embedded cable

(4) Under or through walls


121


(4) (5) Over cabinets whose clearance from the

ceiling is less than the minimum horizontal

dimension of the cabinet to the nearest cabinet

edge that is open to the room or area

(6) I tub and shower walls

(7) Under cabinets and similar built-ins having no

clearance to the floor

424.40 Splices. Embedded cables shall be spliced

only

where necessary and only by approved means,

and in no

case shall The length of the heating cable shall

only be altered using splices identified in the

manufacturer’s instructions be altered.

424.41 Ceiling Installation of Heating Cables on

Dry Board, in

Plaster, and on Concrete Ceilings.

(A) In Walls. Cables shall not be installed in walls

unless

it is necessary for an isolated single run of cable to

be

installed down a vertical surface to reach a

dropped ceiling.

(B) Adjacent Runs. Adjacent runs of heating cable

shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions. cable not exceeding

9 watts/m (23⁄4 waQs/R) shall not be installed

less than 38 mm (11⁄2 in.) on centers.

(C) Surfaces to Be Applied. Heating cables shall be

applied

only to gypsum board, plaster lath, or other fire-

resistant material.


122


With metal lath or other electrically conductive

surfaces,

a coat of plaster or other means employed in

accordance with the heating cable manufacturer’s

instructions shall be applied to completely

separate the metal lath or conductive surface

from the cable.

424.44 Installation of Cables in Concrete or

Poured

Masonry Floors.

(A) Watts per Linear Meter (Foot) Adjacent

Runs. Adjacent runs of heating cable shall be

installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions. Constant

wattage heating cables shall not exceed 54

watts per linear meter (161⁄2 waQs per

linear foot) of cable.

(B) Secured in Place. Cables shall be secured

in place by

nonmetallic frames or spreaders or other

approved means while the concrete or other

finish is applied.

Cables shall not be installed where they

bridge expansion

joints unless protected from expansion and

contraction.

(B) Spacings Between Heating Cable and

Metal Embedded in the Floor. Spacings shall

be maintained between the heating cable

and metal embedded in the floor, unless the

cable is a grounded metal-clad cable.


123


(E) (C) Leads Protected. Leads shall be

protected where they leave the floor by rigid

metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit,

rigid nonmetallic conduit, electrical metallic

tubing, or by other approved means.

(F) (D) Bushings or Approved Fittings.

Bushings or approved

fittings shall be used where the leads emerge

within the

floor slab.

(G) (E) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter

Protection.

Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection

for personnel

shall be provided for cables installed in

electrically heated

floors of bathrooms and kitchens and in

hydromassage bathtub locations.

424.45 Installation of Cables Under Floor

Coverings. New section .

424.47 Label Provided by Manufacturer. New

section.

424.66 Installation. Revised.

(A) General. Duct heaters shall be installed in


instructions in such a manner that operation

does not create a hazard to persons or

property. Furthermore, duct heaters shall be

located with respect to building construction

and other equipment so as to permit access

to the heater. Sufficient clearance shall be


124


maintained to permit replacement of

controls and heating elements and for

adjusting and cleaning of controls and other

parts requiring such attention. See 110.26.

Working space about electrical enclosures

for resistance heating element-type duct

heaters that are mounted on duct systems

and contain equipment that requires

examination, adjustment, servicing, or

maintenance while energized shall comply

with 424.66(B).

(B)Limited Access. New section.

424.99 Installation Under Floor Covering.

(C) (B) Installation. Listed heating panels or panel

sets, if installed under floor covering, shall be

installed on floor surfaces that are smooth and

flat in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and shall also comply with

424.99(C)(1) 424.99(B)(1) through (C)(5).

(4) Coverings. After heating panels or heating

panel sets

are installed and inspected, they shall be

permitted to be

covered by a floor covering that has been

identified by

the manufacturer as being suitable for the

installation.

(5) Fault GFCI Protection. Branch circuits A

device to open all ungrounded conductors

supplying the heating panels or heating

panel sets shall have ground-fault circuit-


125


interrupter protection for personnel,

provided by the manufacturer, shall

function when a low- or high-resistance

line-to-line, line-to-grounded conductor,

or line-to-ground fault occurs, such as the

result of a penetration of the element or

element assembly.

(6) Grounding Braid od Sheath. New section.

Part X. Low-Voltage Fixed Electric Space-Heating

Equipment. New sections and subsections.

ARTICLE 425 Fixed Resistance and Electrode

Industrial Process Heating Equipment. New

sections and subsections.

ARTICLE 427

Fixed Electric Heating Equipment for Pipelines

and Vessels

427.27 Voltage Limitations. Unless protected by

groundfault circuit-interrupter protection for

personnel, The secondary winding of the isolation

transformer connected to the pipeline or vessel

being heated shall not have an output voltage

greater than 30 volts ac.

Where ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection

for


126


personnel is provided, the voltage shall be

permitted to be greater than 30 but not more

than 80 volts.

Exception No. 1: In industrial establishments, the

isolation transformer connected to the pipeline or

vessel being heated shall be permitted to have an

output voltage greater than 30 but not more than

80 volts ac to ground when all of the following

conditions apply:

(1) Conditions of guarding, maintenance, and


persons have access to the installed

system.

(2) Ground-fault protection of the equipment

is provided.

Exception No. 2: In industrial establishments, the

isolation transformer connected to the pipeline or

vessel being heated shall be permitted to have an

output voltage not greater than 132 volts ac to

ground where all of the following conditions

apply:

(1) Conditions of guarding, maintenance and

supervision ensure that only qualified persons

service the installed systems.

(2) Ground-fault protection of equipment is

provided.

(3) The pipeline or vessel being heated is

completely enclosed in a grounded metal

enclosure.

(4) The transformer secondary connections to the

pipeline


127


or vessel being heated are completely enclosed in

a grounded metal mesh or metal enclosure.

ARTICLE 430 Motors, Motor Circuits, and

Controllers

ARTICLE 430 Motors, Motor Circuits, and

Controllers

430.53 Several Motors and Loads on One Branch

Circuit.

(D) Single Motor Taps. Add-

(4) Conductors from the point of the tap from the

branch circuit to a listed manual motor controller

additionally marked “Suitable for Tap Conductor

Protection in Group Installations,” or to a branch-

circuit protective device, shall be permitted to

have an ampacity not less than one-third that of

the branch-circuit conductors. The conductors

from the controller to the motor shall have an

ampacity in accordance with 430.22. The

conductors from the point of tap to the

controller(s) shall (1) be suitably protected from

physical damage and enclosed either by an

enclosed controller or by a raceway and be not

more than 7.5 mm (25 ft) long or (2) have an

ampacity not less than that of the branch-circuit

conductors.

430.130 Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and

Ground-Fault Protection for Single Motor

Circuits Containing . New section.

430.130 Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-

Fault Protection for Single Motor Circuits

Containing Power Conversion Equipment.


128


(A) Circuits Containing Power Conversion

Equipment. Add-

(4) Where an instantaneous trip circuit breaker or

semiconductor fuse are permitted in accordance

with the drive manufacturer’s instructions for use

as the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-

fault protective device for listed power

conversion equipment, they shall be provided as

an integral part of a single listed assembly

incorporating both the protective device and

power conversion equipment.

430.131 Several Motors or Loads on One

Branch Circuit Including Power Conversion

Equipment. New section.

ARTICLE 440 Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration

Equipment.

440.9 Grounding and Bonding. New section.

440.10 Short-Circuit Current Rating. New section.

440.33 Motor-Compressor(s) With or Without

Additional Motor Loads. Conductors supplying

one or more motor-compressor(s) with or without

an additional motor load(s) shall have an

ampacity not less than the sum of each of the

following:


129


(1) The sum of the rated load or branch-circuit

selection current, whichever is larger greater, of

all the motor-compressor{s}

(2) The sum of the full-load current rating of all

currents of the other motors plus

(3) 25 percent of the highest motor or motor-

compressor or full load current rating in the

group.

Exception No. 1: Where the circuitry is interlocked

so as

to prevent the starting and running of a second

motor compressor or group of motor-

compressors, the conductor size shall be

determined from the largest motor-compressor or

group of motor-compressors that is to be

operated at a given time.

Exception No. 2: The branch-circuit conductors for

room

air conditioners shall be in accordance with Part

VII of Article 440.

440.65 Leakage-Current Detector-Interrupter

(LCDI)

and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)

Protection Device. Single-phase cord-and-plug-

connected room air conditioners shall be

provided with one of the following factory-

installed devices factory-installed LCDI or AFCI

protection.

(1) Leakage-current detector-interrupter

(LCDI)]

(2) Arc-fault circuit interrupter (AFCI)

(3) Heat detecting circuit interrupter (HDCI)


130


The LCDI or AFCI protection device shall be an

integral part of the attachment plug or be located

in the power supply cord within 300 mm (12 in.)

of the attachment plug.

ARTICLE 445 Generators ARTICLE 445 Generators

445.11 Marking. Each generator shall be

provided with a nameplate giving the

manufacturer’s name, the rated frequency,

power factor, number of phases if of

alternating current AC, the subtransient and

transient impedances, the rating in kilowatts

or kilovolt amperes, the normal volts and

amperes corresponding to the rating, rated

revolutions per minute, insulation system

class and the rated ambient temperature or

rated temperature rise, and time rating.

Nameplates for all stationary generators and

portable generators rated more than 15 kW

shall also give the power factor, the sub-

transient and transient impedances, the

insulation system class, and the time rating.

Marking shall be provided by the

manufacturer to indicate whether or not in

general neutral is bonded to the generator

frame. Where the bonding of a generator is

modified in the field, additional marking shall

be required to indicate whether the

445.11 Marking. Each generator shall be provided

with a nameplate giving the manufacturer’s

name, the rated frequency, number of phases if

AC, the rating in kilowatts or kilovolt amperes, the

power factor, the normal volts and amperes

corresponding to the rating, rated revolutions per

minute, and the rated ambient temperature or

rated temperature rise.

Nameplates or manufacturer’s instructions shall

provide the following information for all

stationary generators and portable generators

rated more than 15 kW: shall also give the power

factor, the sub-transient and transient

impedances, the insulation system class, and the

time rating.

(1) Subtransient, transient, synchronous, and

zero sequence reactances

(2) Power rating category.

(3) Insulation system class.

(4) Information if the generator is protected

against overload by inherent design, an


131


generator neutral is bonded to the generator

frame.

overcurrent protective relay, circuit

breaker, or fuse

(5) Maximum short-circuit current for

inverter-based generators, in lieu of the

synchronous, subtransient, and transient

reactiances

Marking shall be provided by the manufacturer to

indicate whether or not in general neutral is

bonded to its the generator frame. Where the

bonding of a generator is modified in the field,

additional marking shall be required to indicate

whether the generator neutral is bonded to the

generator frame.

445.13 Ampacity of Conductors.

(A) General. The ampacity of the conductors from

the generator terminals to the first distribution

device(s) containing overcurrent protection shall

not be less than 115 percent of the nameplate

current rating of the generator. It shall be

permitted to size the neutral conductors in

accordance with 220.61. Conductors that must

carry ground-fault currents shall not be smaller

than required by 250.30(A). Neutral conductors of

dc generators that must carry ground-fault

currents shall not be smaller than the minimum

required size of the largest conductor.

Exception: Where the design and operation of the

generator prevent overloading, the ampacity of

the conductors shall not be less than 100 percent

of the nameplate current rating of the generator.

(B)Overcurrent Protection. New section.


132


445.18 Disconnecting Means Required for

Generators.

Generators shall be equipped with

disconnect(s), lockable in the open position,

by means of which the generator and all

protective devices and control apparatus are

able to be disconnected entirely from the

circuits supplied by the generator except

where both of the following conditions

apply:

(1) Portable generators are cord- and

plug-connected, or

(2) Both or the following conditions

apply:

a. The driving means for the generator

can be readily shut down, is rendered

incapable of restarting, and is

lockable in the OFF position in


b. The generator is not arranged to

operate in parallel with another

generator or other source of voltage.

445.18 Disconnecting Means Required for

Generators and Shutdown of Prime Mover.

Revised with new subsections.


Protection for Receptacles on 15-kW or

Smaller Portable Generator. New section.

ARTICLE 450 Transformers and Transformer

Vaults (Including Secondary Ties)

ARTICLE 450 Transformers and Transformer

Vaults (Including Secondary Ties)


133


450.3 Overcurrent Protection. This article

covers switchboards, switchgear, and

panelboards. It does not apply to equipment

operating at over 600 1000 volts, except as

specifically referenced elsewhere in the

Code.

450.5 Grounding Autotransformer.

Add- Exception: An auto transformer with a

wye configuration on its line side and a

zigzag configuration on its load side that

does not permit neutral or ground-fault

current to return over the line connection

shall be permitted on the loud side of a

system grounding connection. This exception

shall not apply to a connection made from a

high-resistance grounded system applied in

accordance with 250-30.

450.10 Grounding.

(A) Dry-Type Transformer Enclosures. New

Section.

(B) Other Metal Parts. Where grounded,

exposed non–current carrying metal parts of

transformer installations, including fences,

guards, and so forth, shall be grounded and

bonded under the conditions and in the

manner specified for electrical equipment


134


and other exposed metal parts in Parts V, VI,

and VII of Article 250.

450.11 Marking. Revised.

(A) General. New section.

(B) Source Marking. New section.

ARTICLE 480 Storage Batteries ARTICLE 480 Storage Batteries

480.2 Definitions.

Cell. New definition.

Container. New definition.

Electrolyte. New definition.

Intercell Connector. New definition.

Nominal Voltage (Battery or Cell). New

definition.

Terminal. New definition.

480.3 Battery and Cell Terminations. New

section.

480.3 Battery and Cell Terminations Equipment.

New section inserted.

480.3 480.4 Battery and Cell Terminations.

(A) Dissimilar Metals Corrosion Prevention.

Where mating dissimilar metals, antioxidant

material suitable for the battery connection shall


135


be used where recommended by the battery

manufacturer.

480.6 DC Disconnect Methods. New section.

480.8 Racks and Trays. Add-

(C) Accessibility. New subsection.

480.9 Battery Locations. Battery locations

shall conform

to 480.9(A), (B), and (C).

(A) Ventilation. Provisions appropriate to

the battery technology shall be made for

sufficient diffusion and ventilation of the

gases from the battery, if present, to prevent

the accumulation of an explosive mixture.

(B) Live Parts. Guarding of live parts shall

comply with

110.27.

(C) Working Space Spaces About Battery

Systems. Working space Spaces about the

battery systems shall comply with 110.26.

Working clearance space shall be measured

from the edge of the battery cabinet, racks,

or trays rack.

For battery racks, there shall be a minimum

clearance of 25 mm ( 1 in) between a cell


136


container and any wall or structure on the

side not requiring access for maintenance.

Battery stands shall be permitted to contact

adjacent walls or structures, provided that

the battery shelf has a free air space for not

less than 90m percent of its length.

(D) Top Terminal Batteries. New section.

(E) Egress. New section.

(F) Piping in Battery Rooms. New section.

(G) Illumination. New section.

480.10 480.11 Vents.

(A) Vented Cells. Each vented cell shall be

equipped with

a flame arrester that is designed to prevent

destruction of the cell due to ignition of gases

within the cell by an external spark or flame

under normal operating conditions.

(B) Sealed Cells. Where the battery is constructed

such that an Sealed battery or cells shall be

equipped

with a pressure-release vent to prevent excessive

accumulation of pressure could occur within the

cell during operation, a pressure-release vent

shall be provided of gas pressure, or the battery

or cell shall be designed to prevent scatter of cell

parts in event of a cell explosion.


137


ARTICLE 490 Equipment, Over 600 Volts,

Nominal

ARTICLE 490 Equipment, Over 600 Volts,

Nominal

490.21 Circuit-Interrupting Devices.

(B) Power Fuses and Fuseholders.

(6) Fuseholders. Fuseholders shall be

designed or installed so that they are de-

energized while a fuse is being replaced. A

field-applied permanent and legible sign, in

accordance with 110.21(B), shall be installed

immediately adjacent to the fuseholders and

shall be worded as follows:

DANGER- DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BEFORE

REPLACING FUSES.

Exception: Fuses and fuseholders designed to

permit fusereplacement by qualified persons

using identified equipment designed for the

purpose without de-energizing the

fuseholder shall be permitted.

490.25 Backfeed. New section.

490.47 Metal-Enclosed and Metal-Clad

Switchgear Used as Service Equipment. Add-

Where the compartment door or panel

provides access to parts that can only be

deenergized and visibly isolated by the

serving utility, the warning sign required by

490.35(A) shall include a notice that access is


138


limited to the serving utility or is permitted

only following an authorization of the serving

utility.

490.48 Substation Design, Documentation,

and Required . New section.

ARTICLE 500 Hazardous (Classified)

Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1

and 2

ARTICLE 500 Hazardous (Classified) Locations,

Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2

500.2 Definitions.

Combustible Dust. Revised.

500.5 Classifications of Locations.

(A) Classifications of Locations General. Locations

shall be classified depending on the properties of

the flammable gas, flammable liquid-produced

vapor, combustible-liquid produced vapors,

combustible dusts, or fibers/flyings that may

could be present, and the likelihood that a

flammable or combustible concentration or

quantity is present. Where pyrophoric materials

are the only materials used or handled, these

locations shall not be classified. Each room,

section, or area shall be

considered individually in determining its

classification. Where pyrophoric materials are the

only materials used or handled, these locations

are outside the scope of this article.


139


Refrigerant machinery rooms that contain

ammonia refrigeration systems and are equipped

with adequate mechanical ventilation that

operates continuously or is initiated by a

detection system at a concentration not

exceeding 150 ppm shall be permitted to be

classified as “unclassified” locations.

Rooms and areas containing ammonia

refrigeration systems that are equipped with

adequate mechanical ventilation may be classified

as “unclassified” locations.

500.8 Equipment.

(C) Marking

(4) Equipment Temperature. The marking

shall specify

the temperature class or operating

temperature at a 40°C

ambient temperature, or at the higher

ambient temperature if the equipment is

rated and marked for an ambient

temperature of greater than 40°C. For

equipment installed in a Class II, Division 1

location, the temperature class and

operating temperature shall be based on

operation of the equipment when blanketed

with the maximum amount of dust that can

accumulate on the equipment. The

temperature class, if provided, shall be

508.8 Equipment.

(F) Optical Fiber Cables. Where An optical fiber

cable contains conductors that are capable of

carrying current (composite optical fiber cable),

the optical fiber cable shall be installed in

accordance with the requirements of Article 500,

501, 502, or 503, as applicable.


140


indicated using the temperature class (T

Codes) shown in Table 500.8(C). Equipment

for Class I and Class II shall be marked with

the maximum safe operating temperature,

as determined by simultaneous exposure to

the combinations of Class I and Class II

conditions.

Exception: Equipment of the non–heat-

producing type,

such as junction boxes, conduit, and fittings,

and equipment of the heat-producing type

having a maximum temperature not more

than 100°C shall not be required to have a

marked operating temperature or

temperature class.

ARTICLE 501 Class I Locations ARTICLE 501 Class I Locations

501.10 Wiring Methods

(A) Class I, Division 1

(1) General. Add-

(C) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP,

OFNR, OFCR, OFNG, OFN, and OFC shall be

permitted to be installed in raceways in

accordance with 501.10(A). These optical

cables shall be sealed in accordance with

501.15.


(A) Class I, Division 1

(1) General.

(1) General.

(7) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR,

OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be


141


(e) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP,

OFNR, OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC

shall be permitted to be installed in raceways

in accordance with 501.10(A). These optical

fiber cables shall be sealed in accordance

with 501.15.

(2) Connections. Add-

(1) Flexible fittings listed for the location, or

(2) Flexible cord in accordance with the

provisions of 501.140, terminated with cord

connectors listed for the location, or

(3) In industrial establishments with

restricted public access, where the

conditions of maintenance and supervision

ensure that only qualified persons service

the installation, for applications limited to

600 volts, nominal or less, and where

protected from damage by location or a

suitable guard, listed Type TC-ER-HL cable

with an overall jacket and a separate

equipment grounding conductor(s) in

accordance with 250.122 that is terminated

with fittings listed for the location.

(B) Class I, Division 2.

(1) General.

permitted to be installed in cable trays or any

other raceway in accordance with 501.10(B).

Optical fiber cables shall be sealed in accordance

with 501.15.

(2) Flexible Connections. Insert-

(3) Interlocked armor Type MC cable with listed

fitting.

Add- (7) For elevator use, an identified elevator

cable of Type EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under the

“use” column in Table 400.4 for “hazardous

(classified) locations” and terminated with listed

fittings.


(1) General. In Class I, Division 2 locations, the

following wiring methods shall be permitted:

1. All wiring methods permitted in 501.10(A) Rigid

metal conduit (RMC) and intermediate metal

conduit (IMC) with listed threadless fittings.

(8) Cablebus


142


(7) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP,


shall be permitted to be installed in cable

trays or any other raceway in accordance

with 501.10(B). Optical fiber cables shall be

sealed in accordance with 501.15.

(2) Flexible Connections. Insert-

(3) Interlocked armor Type MC cable with

listed fitting.

Add- (7) For elevator use, an identified

elevator cable of Type EO, ETP, or ETT,

shown under the “use” column in Table

400.4 for “hazardous (classified) locations”

and terminated with listed fittings.

501.15 Sealing and Drainage.

(1) Entering Enclosures. Revised.

(4) Class I, Division 1 Boundary. In each

conduit run leaving a Class I, Division 1

location A conduit seal shall be required in

each conduit run having a Division 1 location.

The sealing fitting shall be permitted to be

installed on either side of the boundary of

such location within 3.05 m (10 ft) of the

boundary and it shall be designed and

installed so as to minimize the amount of gas

or vapor within the portion of the conduit

installed in Division 1 location portion of the


143


conduit from being that can be

communicated to the conduit beyond the

seal. The conduit run between the conduit

seal and the point at which the conduit

leaves the Division 1 location shall contain

Except for listed explosionproof reducers at

the conduit seal, there shall be no union,

coupling, box, or fitting except for the listed

explosionproof reducer at the conduit seal.

between the conduit seal and the point at

which the conduit leaves the Division 1

location.

Exception No. 1: Metal conduit that contains

no unions,

couplings, boxes, or fittings, that passes

completely through a Division 1 location with

not fittings installed within 300 mm (12 in.)

of either side of the boundary, and passes

completely through a Class I, Division 1

location with no fittings less than 300 mm

(12 in.) beyond each boundary, shall not

require a conduit seal if the termination

points of the unbroken conduit are located in

unclassified locations.

Exception No. 2: For underground conduit

installed in

accordance with 300.5 where the boundary is

below


144


grade, the sealing fitting shall be permitted

to be installed

after the conduit emerges from below grade,

but there shall be no union, coupling, box, or

fitting, other than listed explosionproof

reducers at the sealing fitting, in the conduit

between the sealing fitting and the point at

which the conduit emerges from below

grade.

(2) Class I, Division 2 Boundary. A conduit

seal shall be required In each conduit run

passing leaving from a Class I, Division 2

location into an unclassified location. The

sealing fitting shall be permitted to be

installed on either side of the boundary of

such location boundary within 3.05 m (10 ft)

of the boundary and shall be designed and

installed to minimize the amount of gas or

vapor within the portion of the conduit

installed in the Division 2 location than can

be communicated beyond the seal. Rigid

metal conduit or threaded steel intermediate

metal conduit shall be used between the

sealing fitting and the point at which the

conduit leaves the Division 2 location, and a

threaded connection shall be used at the

sealing fitting. The conduit run between the

conduit seal and the point at which the

conduit leaves the Division 2 location shall

contain Except for listed reducers at the


145


conduit seal, there shall be no union,

coupling, box, or other fitting except for

listed explosionproof reducer installed at the

conduit seal. fitting between the conduit seal

and the point at which the conduit leaves the

Division 2 location. Conduits shall be sealed

to minimize the amount of gas or vapor

within the Division 2 portion of the conduit

from being communicated to the conduit

beyond the seal. Such seals shall not be

required to be explosionproof but shall be

identified for the purpose of minimizing

passage of gases permitted under normal

operating conditions and shall be accessible.

Exception No. 1: Metal conduit that contains

no unions, couplings, boxes, or fittings, and

that passes completely through a Class I,

Division 2 location with no fittings less

installed within than 300 mm (12 in.) beyond

each boundary, shall not be required to be

sealed if the termination points of the

unbroken conduit are located in unclassified

locations.

Exception No. 2: Conduit systems terminating

at in an unclassified location where a wiring

method the metal conduit transitions is made

to cable tray, cablebus, ventilated busway,

Type MI cable, or to cable not installed in any

cable tray or raceway system shall not be

required to be sealed where passing from the

Class I, Division 2 location into the


146


unclassified location under the following

conditions:

(1) The unclassified location shall be

outdoors or, if the conduit system is

all in one room., it shall be permitted

to be indoors.

(2) The conduits shall not terminate at an

enclosure containing an ignition

source in normal operation.

Exception No. 3: Conduit systems passing

from an enclosure or room that is

unclassified as a result of pressurization into

a Class I, Division 2 location shall not require

a seal at the boundary.

Exception No. 4: Segments of aboveground

conduit systems shall not be required to be

sealed where passing from a Class I, Division

2 location into an unclassified location if all

of the following conditions are met:

(1) No part of the conduit system segment

passes through a Class I, Division 1 location

where the conduit segment contains unions,

couplings, boxes, or fittings that are located

within 300 mm (12 in.) of the Class I, Division

1 location.

(2) The conduit system segment is located

entirely in outdoor locations.


147


(3) The conduit system segment is not

directly connected to canned pumps, process

or service connections for flow, pressure, or

analysis measurement, and so forth, that

depend on a single compression seal,

diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or

combustible fluids from entering the conduit

system.

(4) The conduit system segment contains

only threaded metal conduit, unions,

couplings, conduit bodies, andfittings in the

unclassified location.

(5) The conduit system segment is sealed at

its entry to

each enclosure or fitting housing located in

the Division 2 location that contains

terminals, splices, or taps in Class I, Division 2

locations.

(C) Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. Seals installed

in Class I,

Division 1 and Division 2 locations shall

comply with

501.15(C)(1) through (C)(6).

Exception: Seals that are not required to be

explosion proof by 501.15(B)(2) or 504.70

shall be required to comply with 501.15(C).


148


(1) Fittings. Enclosures for that are

connections or equipment shall be provided

with an integral sealing means for sealing, or

sealing fittings listed for the location shall be

used. Sealing fittings shall be listed for use

with one or more specific compounds and

shall be accessible.

(2) Compound. The compound shall provide

a seal against to minimize the passage of gas

or vapors through the seal sealing fitting and

shall not be affected by the surrounding

atmosphere or liquids. The melting point of

the compound and shall not have a melting

point of be less than 93°C (200°F).

(3) Thickness of Compounds. Except for

listed cable sealing fittings, The thickness of

the sealing compound installed in completed

seals, other than listed cable sealing fittings,

in a completed seal shall not be less than the

metric designator (trade size) of the sealing

fitting expressed in the units of

measurement employed; however, and in no

case shall the thickness of the compound be

less than 16 mm (5⁄8 in.).

(4) Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall

not be made in fittings intended only for

sealing with compound, nor shall other

fittings in which splices or taps are made be

filled with compound.


149


(5) Assemblies. An entire assembly shall be

identified for the location In an assembly

where the equipment that may produce arcs,

sparks, or high temperatures is located in a

compartment that is separate from the

compartment containing splices or taps, and

an integral seal is provided where

conductors pass from one compartment to

the other. In Division 1 locations, seals shall

be provided the entire assembly shall be

identified for the location. Seals in conduit

connecting connections to the compartment

containing splices or taps shall be provided in

Class I, Division 1 locations where required

by 501.15(A)(1)(2).

(6) Conductor or Optical Fiber Fill. The cross-

sectional area of the conductors or optical

fiber tubes (metallic or nonmetallic)

permitted in a seal shall not exceed 25

percent of the cross-sectional area of a rigid

metal conduit of the same trade size unless

the seal it is specifically identified for a

higher percentage of fill.

D) Cable Seals, Class I, Division 1. In Class I,

Division 1 locations, cable seals shall be

located according to501.15(D)(1) through

(D)(3).

(1) At Terminations. Cable shall be sealed

with sealing fittings that comply with


150


501.15(C) at all terminations. The sealing

fitting shall comply with 501.15(C).

Multiconductor Type MC-HL cables with a

gas/vaportight continuous corrugated

metallic sheath and an overall jacket of

suitable polymeric material shall be sealed

with a listed fitting after removing the jacket

and any other covering have been removed

so that the sealing compound so surround

each individual insulated conductor in such a

manner as to minimize the passage of gases

and vapors.

Exception: Shielded cables and twisted pair

cables shall not require the removal of the

shielding material or separation of the

twisted pairs, provided the termination is

sealed by an approved means to minimize

the entrance of gases or vapors and prevent

propagation of flame into the cable core.

(2) Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or

Vapors. Cables in conduit with a

gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of

transmitting gases or vapors through the

cable core, installed in conduit shall be

sealed in the Class I, Division 1 location after

removing the jacket and any other coverings

have been removed so that the sealing

compound can will surround each individual

insulated conductor or optical fiber tube and

the outer jacket.


151


Exception: Multiconductor cables with a

gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of


cable core shall be permitted to be

considered as a single conductor by sealing

the cable in the conduit within 450 mm (18

in.) of the enclosure and the cable end within

the enclosure by an approved means to

minimize the entrance of gases or vapors and

prevent the propagation of flame into the

cable core, or by other approved methods.

For shielded cables and twisted pair cables, It

shall not be required to remove the shielding

material or separate the twisted pairs of

shielded cables and twisted pair cables.

(3) Cables Incapable of Transmitting Gases

or Vapors. Each multiconductor cable

installed in conduit shall be considered as a

single conductor if the cable is incapable of


cable core. These cables shall be sealed in

accordance with 501.15(A).

501.17 Process Sealing. Add-

(4) An add-on secondary seal marked

“secondary Seal” and rated for the pressure

and temperature conditions to which it will

be subjected upon failure of the single

process seal.


152


501.105 Meters, Instruments, and Relays


(6) Connections.

(1) A switch complying with 501.105(B)(1) is

provided so that the attachment plug is not

depended on to interrupt current.

Exception: The switch is not required if the

circuit is nonincendive field wiring.

501.125 Motors and Generators

(B) Class I, Division 2. Revised.

501.140 Flexible Cords, Class I, Divisions 1

and 2.

(A) Permitted Uses. Flexible cord shall be

permitted:

(1) For connection between portable lighting

equipment or other portable utilization

equipment and the fixed portion of their

supply circuit. The flexible cord shall be

attached to the utilization equipment with a

cord connector listed for the protection

technique of the equipment wiring

compartment. An attachment plug in

accordance with 501.140(B) shall be

employed.


153


ARTICLE 502 Class II Locations ARTICLE 502 Class II Locations

502.10 Wiring Methods.

(A) Class ll, Division 1

(1) General. Add-

(4) Optical fiber cables Types OFNP, OFCP,



in accordance with 502.10(A). Optical fiber

cables shall be sealed in accordance with

502.15.

(2) Flexible Connections. Add-

(6) For elevator use, an identified elevator

cable of Type EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under

the “use” column in Table 400.4 for

“hazardous (classified) locations” and

terminated with listed dusttight fittings.

(3) Boxes and Fittings. New section.

(B) Class ll, Division 2.

(1) General. Add-

(8) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP,



trays or in any other raceway b accordance


(A) Class ll, Division 1

(1) General. Add-

(5) In industrial establishments with restricted

public access, where the conditions of


qualified persons service the installation, listed

Type ITC-HL cable with a gas/vaportight

continuous corrugated metallic sheath, and an

overall jacket of suitable polymeric material, and

terminated with fittings listed for the application,

and installed in accordance with the provisions of

Article 727.


154


with 502.10(B). Optical fiber cables shall be


502.125 Motor and Generators.

(B) Class II, Division 2. Add-

(4) Machines with sealed bearings, bearing

isolators, and seals.

ARTICLE 503

Class lll Locations

503.5 General. Equipment installed in Class

III locationsshall be able to function at full

rating without developing surface

temperatures high enough to cause

excessive dehydration or gradual

carbonization of accumulated fibers/flyings.

Organic material that is carbonized or

excessively dry is highly susceptible to

spontaneous ignition. The maximum surface

temperatures under operating conditions

shall not exceed 165°C (329°F) for equipment

that is not subject to overloading, and 120°C

(248°F) for equipment (such as motors or

power transformers) that may be

overloaded. In a Class lll, Division 1 location,

the operating temperature shall be the

temperature of the equipment when

blanketed with the maximum amount of


155


dust (simulating fibers/flyings) that can

accumulate on the equipment.


(A) Class lll, Division 1.

(1) General.

(4) add- The cable shall be terminated with

listed fittings.


(6) For elevator use, an identified elevator

cable of Type EO, ETP, or ETT, shown in the

“use” column in Table 400.4 for “hazardous

(classified) locations” and terminated with

listed dusttight fittings.


(A) Class lll, Division 1.

(1) General. Add-

(5) Cablebus.

ARTICLE 504

Intrinsically Safe Systems

504.10 Equipment Installation.

(C) Enclosures. New section.

(D) Simple Apparatus. New section.

504.10 Equipment Installation.

(A) Control Drawing. Intrinsically safe apparatus,

associated apparatus , and other equipment shall

be installed in accordance with the control

drawing(s).


156


A simple apparatus, whether or not shown on the

control drawing(s), shall be permitted to be

installed provided the simple apparatus

Exception: A simple apparatus that does not

interconnect intrinsically safe circuits.

(D) Simple Apparatus. Simple apparatus shall

be permitted to be installed in ay

hazardous (classified) location in which the

maximum surface temperature of the

simple apparatus does not exceed the

ignition temperature of the flammable

gases or vapors, flammable liquids,

combustible dusts, or ignitable

fibers/flyers. For simple apparatus, The

maximum surface temperature can be

determined from the values of the output

power from the associated apparatus or

apparatus to which it is connected to

obtain the temperature class. The

temperature class can be determined by:

504.30 Separation of Intrinsically Safe

Circuit Conductors.

(A) From nonintrinsically Safe Circuit

Conductors

(2) Within Enclosures.

(3) Separation from conductors of

nonintrinsically safe circuits by use of an


157


approved insulating partition that extends to

within 1.5 mm (0.0625 in.) of the enclosure

wall.

(C) From Grounded Metal. New section.

ARTICLE 505 Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations ARTICLE 505 Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations


(A) Classification of Locations. Locations

shall be classified depending on the

properties of the flammable vapors gases,

flammable liquid-produces vapors,

combustible liquid-produced vapors,

combustible dusts, and fibers/flyings ,

liquids, or gases that may be present and the

likelihood that a flammable or combustible

concentration or quantity is present. Where

pyrophoric materials are the only materials

used or handled, these locations shall not be

classified. Each room, section, or area shall

be considered individually in determining its

classification. Where pyrophoric materials

are the only materials used or handled, these

locations are outside the scope of this

article.


(A) Classification of Locations. Locations shall be

classified depending on the properties of the

flammable vapors gases, flammable liquid-

produces vapors, combustible liquid-produced

vapors, combustible dusts, and fibers/flyings that

could be present and the likelihood that a

flammable or combustible concentration or

quantity is present. Each room, section, or area

shall be considered individually in determining its

classification. Where pyrophoric materials are the

only materials used or handled, these locations

are outside the scope of this article.

Refrigerant machinery rooms that contain

ammonia refrigeration systems and are equipped

with adequate mechanical ventilation that

operates continuously or is initiated by a

detection system at a concentration not

exceeding 150 ppm shall be permitted to be

classified as “unclassified” locations.

505.7 Special Precaution.


158


(F) Available Short-Circuit Current for Type

of Protection “e”. New section.


cable

contains conductors that are capable of with or

without carrying current (composite optical fiber

cable), the optical fiber cable shall be installed to

address the associated fire hazard and sealed to

address the associated explosion hazard in

accordance with the requirements of Articles

505.15 and 505.16.


(B) Class 1, Zone 1. Add-

(g) Intrinsic safety type of protection “ib”

shall be permitted using the wiring methods

specified in Article 504.

(h) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP,



in accordance with 505.15(B). Optical fiber

cable shall be sealed in accordance with

505.16.

(i) In industrial establishments with

restricted public access, where the


ensure that only qualified persons service

the installation, for applications limited to


(A) Class I, Zone 0. In Class I, Zone 0 locations,

equipment protected by intrinsic safety “ia” and

equipment protected by encapsulation “ma” shall

be connected using intrinsically safe “ia” circuits

with only intrinsically safe wiring methods in

accordance with Article 504 shall be permitted.

(C) Class I, Zone 2. Add-

(9) Cablebus


159


600 volts nominal or less, for cable diameters

25 mm (1 in.) or less, and where the cable is

not subject to physical damage, Type TC-ER-

HL cable listed for use in Class 1, Zone 1

locations, with an overall jacket and a

separate equipment grounding conductor(s)

in accordance with 250.122, and terminated

with fittings listed for the location, Type TC-

ER-HL cable shall be installed in accordance

with the provisions of Article 336, including

the restrictions of 336.10(7).

(C) Class 1, Zone 2.

(1) General. Add-

(h) Optical cable fiber of Types OFNP, OFCP,

OFNR, OFCR, PFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC


trays or any other raceway in accordance

with 505.15(C). Optical fiber cable shall be



Exception: For elevator use, an identified

elevator cable of Type EO, ETP, or ETT,

shown under the “use” column in Table


that is terminated with listed connectors

that maintain the type of protection of the

terminal compartment, shall be permitted.


160


505.17 Flexible Cords and Connections,

Class I, Zones 1 and 2. Revised.

Add- (B) Instrumentation Connections for

Zone 2. New section.

505.20 Equipment Requirements. Insert-

(D) Materials. New section.

505.26 Process Sealing. Add-

(4) An add-on secondary seal marked

“secondary seal” and rated for the pressure

and temperature conditions to which it will

be subjected upon failure of the single

process seal.

ARTICLE 506 Zone 20, 21, and 22 Locations

for Combustible Dusts or Ignitible

Fibers/Flyings

ARTICLE 506 Zone 20, 21, and 22 Locations for

Combustible Dusts or Ignitible Fibers/Flyings

506.2 Definitions.

Combustible Dust. Dust particles that are

500 microns or smaller (material passing a

U.S. No. 35 Standard Sieve as defined in

ASTM E 11-09, Standard Specifications for

Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes)

and present a fire or explosion hazard when

dispersed and ignited in air. Any finely


161


divided solid material that is 420 microns

(0.017 in.) or smaller in diameter (material

passing a U.S. No. 40 Standard Sieve) and

presents a fire or explosion hazard when

dispersed and ignited in air.

[499:3.3.3]

506.3 Other Articles. New section.

506.6 Material Groups. New section

inserted.

506.9 Equipment Requirements.

(C) Marking.

(1) Division Equipment.

(2) Temperature classification in accordance

with 506.9(D) Material group in accordance

with 506.6.

Add- (3) Maximum surface temperature in

accordance with 506.9(D), marked as a

temperature value in degrees C, preceded by

“T” and followed by the symbol “C”.

(2)Zone Equipment.

Insert- (4) Temperature classification

Maximum surface temperature in

accordance with 506.9(D), marked as a

506.9 Equipment Requirements.


cable, with or without current-carrying

conductors

contains conductors that are capable of carrying

current

(composite optical fiber cable), the optical fiber

cable shall be installed to address the associated

explosion hazard in accordance with the

requirements of Articles 506.15 and 506.16.


162


temperature value in degrees C, preceded by

“T” and followed by the symbol “C”.

Add- Exception: Associated apparatus NOT

suitable for installation in a hazardous

(classified) locations shall be required to be

marked only with 506.9(C)(2)(2), (3), and (5),

but BOTH the symbol AEx in 506.9(C)(2)(2)

and the symbol for the type of protection in

506.9(C)(2)(3) shall be enclosed within the

same square brackets: for example, [AEx iaD]

or or [AEx ia] 111C.

(D) Temperature Classifications. Equipment

shall bemarked to show the maximum

surface temperature referenced to a 40°C

ambient, or at the higher marked ambient

temperature if the equipment is rated and

marked for an ambient temperature if

greater than 400 C. For equipment installed

in a Zone 20 or Zone 21 location, the

operating temperature shall be based on

operation of the equipment when blanketed

with the maximum amount if dust (or with

dust-simulating fibers/flyings) that can

accumulate on the equipment. Electrical

equipment designed for use in the ambient

temperature range between −20°C and

+40°C shall require no additional ambient

temperature marking. Electrical equipment

that is designed for use in a range of ambient

temperatures other than −20°C and +40°C is

considered to be special; and the ambient


163


temperature range shall then be marked on

the equipment, including either the symbol

“Ta” or “Tamb” together with the special

range of ambient temperatures. As an

example, such a marking might be “–30°C ≤

Ta ≤ +40°C.” Electrical equipment suitable for

ambient temperatures exceeding 40°C

(104°F) shall be marked with both the

maximum ambient temperature and the

operating temperature at that ambient

temperatures.

Table 506.9(C)(2)(3) Types of Protection

Designation. Revised.


(A) Zone 20.

(2) Add-

Exception: No. 1 MI cable and fittings listed

for Class II, Division 1 locations shall be

permitted to be used.

Exception No. 2: Equipment identified as

intrinsically safe “iaD” or “ia” shall be

permitted to be connected using the wiring

methods identified in 504.20.

(6) Add-


(C) Zone 22. Add-

(10) Cablebus


164


Exception No. 1: Flexible conduit and flexible

conduit and cord fittings listed for Class II,

Division 1 locations shall be


Exception No. 2: For elevator use, an

identified elevator cable of Type EO, ETP, or

ETT, shown under the “use” column in Table


and terminated with listed connectors that

maintain the type of protection of the

terminal compartment shall be permitted.

Add- (7) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP,

OFCP, OFNR, OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and

OFC shall be permitted to be installed in

raceways in accordance with 506.15(A).

Optical fiber cables shall be sealed in


(b) Zone 21. Add-

Exception: Equipment identified as

intrinsically safe “ibD” or “ib” shall be

permitted to be connected using the wiring

methods identified in 504.20.

(C) Zone 22. In Zone 22 locations, the

following wiring methods shall be permitted.

(1) All wiring methods permitted in

506.15(B).


165


(2) Rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal

conduit, electrical metallic tubing, dusttight

wireways.

(3) Type MC or MI cable with listed

termination fittings.

(4) Type PLTC and Type PLTC-ER cable in

accordance with the provisions of Article

725, including installation in cable tray

systems. The cable shall be terminated with

listed fittings.

(5) Type ITC and Type ITC-ER cable as

permitted in 727.4

and terminated with listed fittings.

(6) Type MC, MI, MV, or TC, or TC-ER cable

installed in ladder, ventilated trough, or

ventilated channel cable trays in a single

layer, with a space not less than the larger

cable diameter between two adjacent

cables, shall be the wiring method employed.

Single-conductor Type MV cables shall be

shielded or metallic armored. The cable shall

be terminated with listed fittings.

(7) Nonincendive field wiring Intrinsic safety

type of protection “ic” shall be permitted

using any


166


of the wiring methods permitted for

unclassified locations. Nonincendive field

wiring Intrinsic safety type of protection “ic”

systems shall be installed in accordance with

the control drawing(s). Simple apparatus, not

shown on the control drawing, shall be

permitted in a nonincendive field wiring

circuit of intrinsic safety type of protection

“ic”, provided the simple apparatus does not

interconnect the nonincendive field wiring

intrinsic safety type of protection “ic”circuit

to any other circuit.

Separation of nonincendive field wiring

intrinsic safety type of protection “ic”circuits

shall be in accordance with one of the

following:

a. Be in separate cables. Be in

multiconductor cables where the conductors

have insulation with a minimum thickness of

0.25 mm (0.01 in.)

Add- (9) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP,

OFCP, OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC


trays or any raceway in accordance with

506.15(C). Optical fiber cables shall be sealed

in accordance with 506.16.

506.20 Equipment Installation. Insert-


167


(D) Material Group. New section.

506.25 Grounding and Bonding. Regardless

of the voltage of the electrical system,

grounding and bonding shall comply with

Article 250 and the requirements in506.25(A)

and (B).

ARTICLE 511 Commercial Garages, Repair and

Storage

511.3 Area Classification, General.

(C)Major Repair Garages, Major and Minor.

Where vehicles using Class I liquids or heavier-

than-air gaseous fuels (such as LPG) are repaired,

hazardous area classification guidance is found in

Table 511.2(C) flammable liquids having a flash

point below 38°C (100°F) such as gasoline, or

gaseous fuels such as natural gas, hydrogen, or

LPG, will not be dispensed, but repair activities

that involve the transfer of such fluids or gases

are performed, the classification rules in (1), (2),

and (3) shall apply.

(D) Repair Garages Major. Where vehicles using

lighter-than-air gaseous fuels (such as hydrogen

or natural gas) are repaired or stored, hazardous

area classification guidance is found in Table

511.3(C).


168


ARTICLE 514 Motor Fuel Dispensing

Facilities

ARTICLE 514 Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities

514.3 Classification of Locations.

(C) Motor Fuel Dispensing Stations to

Boatyards and Marinas. New section.

(D) Closed Construction. New section.

(E) Open Construction. New section.


(B)(2) Compressed Natural Gas, Liquefied Natural

Gas, and Liquefied Petroleum Gas Areas.

Revised.

(B)(3) Fuel Storage. New subsection.

514.11 Circuit Disconnects.

(A) General Emergency Electrical Disconnects.

Fuel dispensing systems shall be provided with

one or more clearly identified emergency shutoff

devices or electrical disconnects. Such devices or

disconnects shall be installed in approved

locations but not more than 6 m (20 ft) or more

than 30 m (100 ft) from the fuel dispensing

devices that they serve. Emergency shutoff

devices or electrical disconnects shall disconnect

power to all dispensing devices.; to all remote

pumps serving the dispensing devices; to all

associated power, control, and signal circuits; and

to all other electrical equipment in the hazardous

(classified) locations surrounding the fuel

dispensing devices. When more than one

emergency shutoff or electrical disconnect is

provided, all devices shall be interconnected.

Resetting from an emergency shutoff condition

shall require manual intervention and the manner

of resetting shall be approved by the authority


169


having jurisdiction [30A:6.7] Each circuit leading

to or through dispensing

equipment, including all associated power,

communications, data, and video circuits, and

equipment for remote pumping systems, shall be

provided with a clearly identified and readily

accessible switch or other approved means,

located remote from the dispensing devices, to

disconnect simultaneously from the source of

supply, all conductors of the circuits, including the

grounded conductor, if any. Single-pole breakers

utilizing handle ties shall not be permitted.

(B) Attended Self-Service Motor Fuel Dispensing

Facilities. At attended motor fuel dispensing

facilities, the devices or disconnected shall be

readily accessible to the attendant

Emergency controls as specified in 514.11(A) shall

be installed at a location acceptable to the

authority having jurisdiction, but controls shall

not be more than 30 m (100 ft) from dispensers.

[30A:6.7.1]

(C) Unattended Self-Service Motor Fuel

Dispensing Facilities. At unattended motor fuel

dispensing facilities, the devices or disconnects

shall be readily accessible to patrons and at least

one additional device or disconnect shall be

readily accessible to each group of dispensing

devices on an individual island Emergency

controls as specified in 514.11(A) shall be installed

at a location acceptable to the authority having

jurisdiction, but the control shall be more than 6

m (20 ft) but less than 30 m (100 ft) from the


170


dispensers. Additional emergency controls shall

be installed on each group of dispensers or the

outdoor equipment used to control the

dispensers. Emergency controls shall shut off all

power to all dispensing equipment at the station.

Controls shall be manually reset only in a manner

approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

[30A:6.7.2]

ARTICLE 516 Spray Applications, Dipping,

Coating, and Printing Processes Using

Flammable or Combustible Materials

ARTICLE 516 Spray Applications, Dipping,

Coating, and Printing Processes Using Flammable

or Combustible Materials

516.1 Definitions.

Flash-Off Area: New definition.

Limited Finishing Workstation. New

definition.

Resin Application Area. New definition.

Spray Area. Revised.

Spray Booth. Revised.

Unenclosed Spray Area. New definition.

516.1 516.2 Definitions.

Limited Finishing Workstation. Revised.


171


Membrane Enclosure. New definition

Outdoor Spray Area. New definition.

Resin Application Area. New definition.

Spray Area. Revised.

Spray Booth. Revised.

Unenclosed Spray Area. Revised.


Classification is based on dangerous

quantities of flammable vapors, combustible

mists, residues, dusts, or deposits that are

present or might be present in quantities

sufficient to produce ignitable or explosive

mixtures, with air.

Insert- (A) Zone Classification of Locations.

New section.

(B)Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 0

Locations. Add- (3) The interior of any ink

fountain, ink reservoir, or ink tank.

(C) Class I, Division 1; Class I, Zone 1; or

Class II, Division 1; or Zone 21 Locations.

Add- (7) For limited finishing workstations,

the area inside the curtains or partitions. See

Figure 516.3(D)(5).


172


(D) Class I, Division 2: Class I, Zone 2; Class

II, Division 2; or Zone 22 Locations. The

following spaces shall be considered Class I,

Division 2, or Class I, Zone 2, or Class II,

Division 2; or Zone 22, as applicable.

(1) Open Spraying Unenclosed Spray

Processes. For open unenclosed spraying, all

space outside of but within 6 m (20 ft)

horizontally and 3 m (10 ft) vertically of the

Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 location

as defined in 516.3(A), and not separated

from it by partitions. See Figure 516.3(C)(1).

[33:6.5.1]

(2) Closed-Top, Open-Face, and Open-Front

Spraying Spray Booths and Spray Rooms.

If spray application operations are conducted

within a closed-top, open-face, or open-front

booth or room, as shown in Figure

516.3(D)(2), any electrical wiring or

utilization equipment located outside of the

booth or room but within 915 mm (3 ft) of

any opening the boundaries designated as

Division 2 or Zone 2 in Figure 516.3(C)(2)

shall be suitable for Class I, Division 2; Class I,

Zone 2; Class II, Division 2 locations,

whichever is applicable. The Class I, Division

2, Class I, Zone 2; Class II,


173


Division 2; Zone 22mlocations, shown in

Figure 516.3(C D)(2) shall extend from the

edges of the open face or open front of the

booth or room in accordance with the

following:

(3)Open-Top Spraying Spray Booths. For

spraying operations conducted within an

open top spray booth, the space 900 mm (3

ft) vertically above the booth and within 900

mm (3 ft) of other booth openings shall be

considered Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2;

Class II, Division 2; or Zone 22. [33:6.5.3]

(4)Enclosed Spray Booths and Spray Rooms.

For spraying operations confined to an

enclosed spray booth or room, electrical

area classification shall be as follows: the

space within 900 mm (3 ft) in all directions

from any openings shall be considered Class

I, Division 2; or Class I, Zone 2; or Class II,

Division 2 as shown in Figure 516.3(C)(4).

[33:6.5.4]

(1) The area within 915 mm (3 ft) of any

opening shall be classified as Class I,

Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class II,

Division 2; or Zone 22 locations,

whichever is applicable, as shown in

Figure 516.3(D)(4)(1).


174


(2) Where exhaust air is recirculated,

both of the following shall apply:

a. The interior of any recirculation path

from the secondary particulate filters up

to and including the air supply plenum

shall be classified as Class I, Division 2;

Class I, Zone 2; Class II, Division 2; or

Zone 22 locations, whichever is

applicable.

b. The interior of fresh air supply ducts

shall be unclassified.

(3) Where exhaust air is not recirculated,

the interior of fresh air supply ducts and

fresh air supply plenums shall be

unclassified.

(5) Dip Tanks and and Drain Boards-

Surrounding Space Limited Finishing

Workstation. New section.

(6) Dip Tanks and Drain Boards- Space

Above Floor Areas Adjacent to Open

Dipping and Coating Processes. New section.

(7) Enclosed Coating and Dipping

Operations. New section.

Figure 516.3(D)(5) Class I, Division 2; Class I,

Zone 2; Class II, Division 2; or Zone 22

Locations Adjacent to a Limited Finishing


175


Workstation. [33:Figure 14.3.5.1]. New

figure.

Figure 516.3(D)(6)(b) Electrical Area

Classification for Open Dipping and Coating

Processes with Peripheral Vapor

Containment and Ventilation- Vapors

Confined to Process Equipment. [34:Figure

6.4(b)]. New figure.

Figure 516.3(D)(6)(c) Electrical Area


Processes with Partial Peripheral Vapor

Containment and Ventilation- Vapors NOT


6.4(c)]. New figure.

Figure 516.3(D)(6)(d) Electrical Area


Processes with Partial Peripheral Vapor

Containment and Ventilation- Vapors


6.4(d)]. New figure.

Figure 516.3(D)(6)(e) Electrical Area

Classification for a Typical Printing Process.

[34:Figure 6.4(c)]. New figure.

516.4 Wiring and Equipment in Class I

Locations

(C) Illumination. Revised.


176


(F) Static Electric Discharges. New section.

Figure 516.3(D)(7) Electrical Area

Classification Around in Enclosed Dipping or

Coating Process. [34:Figure 6.5]. New figure.

Figure 516.4 Electrical Area Classification for

Class I Liquid Operations Around Open

Containers, Supply Containers, Waste

Containers, Spray Gun Cleaners, and solvent

Distillation Units [33: Figure 6.5.5.2] New figure.

PART II Open Containers

New part and sections.

Figure 516.4(C)(1) Example of a Luminaire

that is Mounted Outside of the Spray Area

and is Secured from Outside the Spray Area.

[34:Figure 6.6.1]. New figure.

Figure 516.4(C)(3) Example of a Luminaire

that is an Integral Part of the Spray Area

and is Serviced from Inside the Spray Area.

[34:Figure 6.6.3]. New figure.

PART III. Spray Application Processes

New part and sections.

Figure 516.5(D)(1) Electrical Area Classification

for Unenclosed Spray Areas [33: Figure 6.5.1]

New figure.


177


Figure 516.5(D)(2) Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone

2; Class II, Division 2; or Zone 22 Locations

Adjacent to a Closed Top, Open Face, or Open

Front Spray Booth or Room [33: Figure 6.5.2]

New figure.



Adjacent to an Enclosed Spray Booth or Spray

Room [33: Figure 6.5.4] New figure.



Adjacent to a Limited Finishing Workstation [33:

Figure 14.3.5.1] New figure.

Figure 516.6(C)(a) Example of a Luminaire that is

Mounted Outside of the Spray Area and is

Services from Outside the Spray Area [33: Figure

6.6.1] New figure.

Figure 516.6(C)(b) Example of a Luminaire that is

an Integral Part of the Spray Area and is Serviced

from Inside the Spray Area [33: Figure 6.6.3] New

figure.

516.10 Special Equipment.

A. Fixed Electrostatic Equipment.

(10) Other Than Nonincendive Equipment.


178


(a) Conveyors, or hangers, and application

equipment shall be arranged so as to that a

minimum separation maintain a safe

distance of at least twice the sparking

distance is maintained between the

workpiece or material being sprayed

between goods being painted and

electrodes, electrostatic atomizing heads, or

charged conductors. Warnings defining this

safe distance shall be posted. [33:11.4.1]

(B) Electrostatic Hand-Spraying Equipment.

This section shall apply to any equipment

using electrostatically charged elements for

the atomization, charging, and/or

precipitation of flammable and combustible

materials for coatings on articles, or for

other similar purposes in which the charging

or atomizing device is handheld and or

manipulated during the spraying operation.

Electro-static hand-spraying equipment and

devices used in connection with paint-

spraying operations shall be of listed types

and shall comply with 516.10(B)(1) through

(B)(5).

(3) Handle. The handle of the spraying gun

shall be electrically connected to ground by a

conductive material metallic connection and

be constructed so that the operator in

normal operating position is in direct

intimate electrical contact with the grounded


179


handle with a resistance of not more than 1

megohm to prevent buildup of a static

charge on the operator’s body. Signs

indicating the necessity for grounding other

persons entering the spray area shall be

conspicuously posted.

(4) Electrostatic Equipment. All electrically

conductive objects in the spraying area,

except those objects required by the process

to be at high voltage, shall be electrically

connected to ground with a resistance of not

more than 1 megohm adequately grounded.

This requirement shall apply to paint

containers, wash cans, and any other

electrical conductive objects or devices in

the area. The equipment shall carry a

prominent, permanently installed warning

regarding the necessity for this grounding

feature.

Figure 516.29(a) Electrical Area Classification for

Open Dipping and Coating Processes without

Vapor Containment or Ventilation [34; Figure

6.4(a)] New figure.

Figure 516.29(b) Electrical Area Classification for

Open Dipping and Coating Processes with

Peripheral Vapor Containment and Ventilation-

Vapors Confined to Process Equipment [34;

Figure 6.4(a)] New figure.


180


Figure 516.29(c) Electrical Area Classification for

Open Dipping and Coating processes with partial

Peripheral Vapor Containment and Ventilation-

Vapors Not Confined to Process Equipment [34;

Figure 6.4(c)] New figure.

Figure 516.29(d) Electrical Area Classification for

a Typical Printing Process [34; Figure 6.4(d)] New

figure.

ARTICLE 517 Health Care Facilities ARTICLE 517 Health Care Facilities

517.2 Definitions.

Patient Care Space. New definition.

Patient Care Vicinity. New definition.

Wet Procedure Location. New definition.

517.2 Definitions.

Invasive Procedure. New definition.

Medical Office (Dental Office). New definition.

Patient Care Space. Revised.

517.14 Panelboard Bonding. The equipment

grounding terminal buses of the normal and

essential branch-circuit panelboards serving

the same individual patient care vicinity shall

be connected together with an insulated

continuous copper conductor not smaller

than 10 AWG. Where two or more

panelboards serving the same individual

patient care vicinity are served from

separate transfer switches on the essential

electrical emergency system, the equipment


181


grounding terminal buses of those

panelboards shall be connected together

with an insulated continuous copper

conductor not smaller than 10 AWG. This

conductor shall be permitted to be broken in

order to terminate on the equipment

grounding terminal bus in each panelboard.

517.16 Receptacles with Insulated

Grounding Terminals.

All isolated ground receptacles shall not be

installed within a patient care vicinity

[99:6.3.2.2.7.1(B)] Receptacles with insulated

grounding terminals, as described in

250.146(D), shall not be permitted.

517.16 Receptacles with Insulated Grounding

Terminals.

(A) Inside of a Patient Care Vicinity. An All

isolated grounding receptacle shall not be

installed within a patient care vicinity

[99:6.3.2.2.7.1(B)].

(B) Outside of a Patient Care Vicinity. Isolated

ground receptacle(s) installed in patient care

spaces outside of a patient care vicinity(s) shall

comply with 517.16(B)(1) and (2).

(1) The grounding terminals of isolated ground

receptacles installed in branch circuits for patient

care spaces shall be connected to an insulated

equipment grounding conductor in accordance

with 250.146(D) in addition to the equipment

grounding conductor path required in 517.13(A).

The equipment grounding conductor connected

to the grounding terminals of isolated ground

receptacles in patient care spaces shall be clearly

identified along the equipment grounding

conductor’s entire length by green insulation with

one or more yellow stripes.

(3) The insulated grounding conductor

required in 517.13(B) shall be clearly

identified along its entire length by green


182


insulation, with no yellow stripes, and shall

not be connected to the grounding

terminals of isolated ground receptacles

but shall be connected to the box of

enclosure indicted in 517.12(B)(1)(2) and

to non-current carrying conductive

surfaces of fixed electrical equipment

indicated in 517.13(B)(1)(3).

517.18 General Care Areas.

(A) Patient Bed Location. Each patient bed

location shall be supplied by at least two

branch circuits, one from the critical branch

emergency system and one from the normal

system. All branch circuits from the normal

system shall originate in the same

panelboard. The electrical receptacles or the

cover plate for the electrical receptacles

supplied from the critical branch shall have a

distinct color or marking so as to be readily

identifiable and shall also indicate the

panelboard and branch-circuit number

supplying them.

Branch circuits The branch circuit serving

patient bed locations shall not be part of a

multi-wire branch circuit.

Exception No. 1: Branch circuits serving only

special purpose outlets or receptacles, such

as portable X-ray outlets, shall not be


183


required to be served from the same

distribution panel or panels.

Exception No. 2: Requirements of 517.18(A)

shall not apply to patient bed locations in

clinics, medical and dental offıces, and

outpatient facilities; psychiatric, substance

abuse, and rehabilitation hospitals; sleeping

rooms of nursing homes and limited care

facilities meeting the requirements of

517.10(B)(2).

Exception No. 3: A general care patient bed

location served from two separate transfer

switches on the critical branch emergency

system shall not be required to have circuits

from the normal system.

B) Patient Bed Location Receptacles. Each

patient bed location shall be provided with a

minimum of four eight receptacles. They

shall be permitted to be of the single,

duplex, or quadruplex type, or any

combination of the three. All receptacles,

whether four or more, shall be listed

“hospital grade” and shall be so identified.

The grounding terminal of each receptacle

shall be connected to an insulated copper

equipment grounding conductor sized in

accordance with Table 250.122.

(C) Designated General Care Pediatric

Locations. Receptacles located within the


184


patient rooms, bathrooms, playrooms,

activity rooms of, and patient care areas of

designated pediatric locations units, other

than nurseries, shall be listed tamper

resistant or shall employ a listed tamper-

resistant cover.

517.19 Critical Care Areas.

(A) Patient Bed Location Branch Circuits.

Each patient bed location shall be supplied

by at least two branch circuits, one or more

from the emergency system critical branch

and one or more circuits from the normal

system. At least one branch circuit from the

emergency system shall supply an outlet(s)

only at that bed location. All branch circuits

from the normal system shall be from a

single panelboard. Emergency system Critical

branch receptacles shall be identified and

shall also indicate the panelboard and circuit

number supplying them.

The branch circuit serving patient bed

locations shall not be part of a multi-wire

branch circuit.


special purpose receptacles or equipment in

critical care areas spaces shall be permitted

to be served by other panelboards.

517.19 Critical Care Areas.

(A) Patient Bed Location Branch Circuits. Each

patient bed location shall be supplied by at least

two branch circuits, one or more from the critical

branch and one or more circuits from the normal

system. At least one branch circuit from the

emergency system shall supply an outlet(s) only at

that bed location.

The electrical receptacles or the cover plates for

the electrical receptacles supplied from the life

safety and critical branches shall have a distinct

color or marking so as to be readily identifiable.

[99:6.4.2.2.6.2(C)]

All branch circuits from the normal system shall

be from a single panelboard. Critical branch

receptacles shall be identified and shall also

indicate the panelboard and circuit number

supplying them. The branch circuit serving patient

bed locations shall not be part of a multi-wire

branch circuit.


special purpose receptacles or equipment in


185


Exception No. 2: Critical care locations spaces

served from two separate critical branch

transfer switches on the emergency system

shall not be required to have circuits from the

normal system.

(B) Patient Bed Location Receptacles.

(1) Minimum Number and Supply. Each

patient bed location shall be provided with a

minimum of six 14 receptacles, at least one

of which shall be connected to either of the

following:

(1) The normal system branch circuit

required in 517.19(A)

(2) An emergency system A critical branch

circuit supplied by a different transfer switch

than the other receptacles at the same

patient bed location.

critical care (Category 1) spaces shall be permitted

to be served by other panelboards.

Exception No. 2: Critical care spaces served from

two separate critical (Category 1) branch transfer

switches shall not be required to have circuits

from the normal system.

(C) Operating Room Receptacles. New section.

517.29 Essential Electrical Systems for Hospitals

and Other Health Care Facilities. New section and

subsection.

517.30 Essential Electrical Systems for

Hospitals.

(B) General.

(1) Separate Systems Branches. Essential

electrical systems for hospitals shall be

517.30 Essential Electrical Systems for Hospitals

Sources of Power. Revised.


186


comprised of two three separate systems

branches capable of supplying a limited

amount of lighting and power service that is

considered essential for life safety and

effective hospital operation during the time

the normal electrical service is interrupted

for any reason. The three branches are life

safety, critical, and equipment. These two

systems shall be the emergency system and

the equipment system.

(4)(2) Transfer Switches. The number of

transfer switches to be used shall be based

on reliability, design, and load

considerations. Each branch of the

emergency essential electrical system and

each equipment system shall have one or

more transfer switches. One transfer switch

and downstream distribution system shall be

permitted to serve one or more branches or

systems in a facility with a maximum

demand on the essential electrical system of

150 kVA.

(C) Wiring Requirements.

(1) Separation from Other Circuits. The life

safety branch and critical branch of the

emergency essential electrical system shall

be kept entirely independent of all other

wiring and equipment and shall not enter the

same raceways, boxes, or cabinets with each

other or other wiring. Where general care


187


locations are served from two separate

transfer switches on the emergency essential

electrical system in accordance with

517.18(A), Exception No. 3, the general care

circuits from the two separate systems shall

be kept independent of each other.

Where critical care locations are served from

two separate transfer switches on the

emergency essential electrical system in

accordance with 517.19(A), Exception No. 2,

the critical care circuits from the two

separate systems shall be kept independent

of each other. Wiring of the life safety

branch and the critical branch shall be

permitted to occupy the same raceways,

boxes, or cabinets of other circuits not part

of the branch where

such wiring complies with one of the

following:

(1) Is in transfer equipment enclosures

(2) Is in exit or emergency luminaires

supplied from two sources

(3) Is in a common junction box attached to

exit or emergency luminaires supplied from

two sources


188


(4) Is for two or more emergency circuits

supplied from the same branch and same

transfer switch

The wiring of the equipment system branch

shall be permitted to occupy the same

raceways, boxes, or cabinets of other circuits

that are not part of the emergency system.

(4) Mechanical Protection of the

Emergency System. The wiring of the

life safety and critical branches

emergency systems in hospitals shall

be mechanically protected. Where

installed as branch circuits in patient

care spaces areas, the shall comply

with the installation requirements of

517.13(A) and (B). The following

wiring methods shall be permitted:

(1) Nonflexible metal raceways, Type MI

cable, Type RTRC marked with the suffix -

XW, or Schedule 80 PVC conduit.

Nonmetallic raceways shall not be used for

branch circuits that supply patient care

areas.

(D) Capacity of Systems. The essential

electrical system to be served by each

system and branch. Feeders shall have

adequate the capacity and rating to meet the

maximum demand likely to be produced by


189


the connected load for the operation of all

functions and equipment shall be sized in

accordance with 215.2 and Part III of Article

220 Articles 215 and 220. The generator

set(s) shall have sufficient capacity and

proper rating to meet the demand produced

by the load of the essential electrical

system(s) at any given time. Demand

calculations for sizing of the generator set(s)

shall be based on any of the following:

(1) Prudent demand factors and historical

data

(2) Connected load

(3) Feeder calculation procedures described

in Article 220

(4) Any combination of the above

The sizing requirements in 700.4 and 701.4

shall notapply to hospital generator set(s).

(E) Receptacle Identification. The cover

plates for the electrical receptacles or the

electrical receptacles themselves supplied

from the emergency essential electrical

system shall have a distinctive color or

marking so as to be readily identifiable.

[99:4.4.2.2.4.2(B) 99:6.4.2.2.6.2(C)]

(F) Feeders from Alternate Power Sources.

New section.


190


(G) Coordination. New section.

517.31 Emergency System Branches

Requiring Automatic Connection. Those

functions of patient care depending on

lighting or appliances that are connected to

the emergency essential electrical system

shall be divided into two mandatory

branches: the life safety branch and the

critical branch, described in 517.32 and

517.33.

The life safety and critical branches of the

emergency system shall be installed and

connected to the alternate power source so

that all functions supplied by these branches

specified herein here shall for the emergency

system shall be automatically restored to

operation within 10 seconds after

interruption of the normal source.

[99:4.4.2.2.2.1, 4.4.3.1 99:6.4.3.1]

517.31 Branches Requiring Automatic

Connection Requirements for the Essential

Electrical Systems. Revised.

517.32 Life Safety Branch. No function other

than those listed in 517.32(A) through (H)

shall be connected to the life safety branch.

The life safety branch of the emergency

essential electrical system shall supply power

for the following lighting, receptacles, and

equipment.

(F) Generator Set Accessories. Generator set

accessories as required for generator

517.32 571.33 Life Safety Branch. No function

other than

Add-

(C)(2) Alarm and alerting systems (other than fire

alarm systems) shall be connected to the life

safety branch or critical branch. [99:6.4.2.2.3.3]

(E) Generator Set and Transfer Switch Location.

Generator set locations as follows:


191


performance. Loads dedicated to a specific

generator, including the fuel transfer

pump(s), ventilation fans, electrically

operated louvers, controls, cooling system,

and other generator accessories essential for

generator operation, shall be connected to

the life safety branch or to the output

terminals of the generator with overcurrent

protective devices.

(1) Task illumination

(2) battery charger for emergency battery-

powered lighting unit(s)

(3) Select receptacles at the generator set

location and essential electrical system transfer

switch locations. [99:6.4.2.2.3.2(4)]

517.33 Critical Branch.

(A) Task Illumination and Selected

Receptacles. The critical branch of the

emergency essential electrical system shall

supply power for task illumination, fixed

equipment, selected receptacles, and special

power circuits serving the following areas

and functions related to patient care:

517.34 Equipment System Connection to

Alternate Power Source. The equipment

system shall be installed and connected to

the alternate power source such that the

equipment described in 517.34(A) is

automatically restored to operation at

appropriate time-lag intervals following the

energizing of the emergency essential

electrical system. Its arrangement shall also

provide for the subsequent connection of

equipment described in 517.34(B).

[99:4.4.2.2.3.2]


192


(A) Equipment for Delayed Automatic

Connection. Add-

(8) Supply return, exhaust ventilating

systems and/or air-conditioning systems

serving telephone equipment rooms and

closets and data equipment rooms and

closets.

517.35 Sources of Power

(E) Location of Essential Electrical System

Components.

Careful consideration shall be given to the

location of the spaces housing the

components of the essential electrical

system to minimize interruptions caused by

natural forces common to the area (e.g.,

storms, floods, earthquakes, or hazards

created by adjoining structures or activities).

Consideration shall also be given to the

possible interruption of normal electrical

services resulting from similar causes as well

as possible disruption of normal electrical

service due to internal wiring and equipment

failures. Consideration shall be given to the

physical separation of the main feeders of

the alternate source from the main feeders

of the normal electrical source to prevent

possible simultaneous interruption.


193


517.41 Essential Electrical Systems.

(E) Receptacle Identification. The cover

plates for the

electrical receptacles or the electrical

receptacles themselves supplied from the

emergency electrical system shall have a

distinctive color or marking so as to be

readily identifiable. [99:4.5.2.2.4.2]

Nonlocking type, 125-volt, 15- and 20-

ampere receptacles shall have an illuminated

face or an indicator light to indicate that

there is power to the receptacle.

517.45 Essential Electrical Systems for Other

Health Care Facilities.

(A) Essential Electrical Distribution. If required by

the governing body, the essential electrical

distribution system for basic care (Category 3)

patient care spaces shall be comprised of an

alternate power system capable of supplying a

limited amount of lighting and power service for

the orderly cessation of procedures during a time

normal power service is interrupted. The essential

electrical distribution system shall be a battery or

generator system.

(D) General Care (Category 2) Patient Care

Spaces


194


Power Systems. Where general care (Category 2)

patient carespaces are present, the essential

electrical distribution systems shall be as

described in 517.40 through 517.45.

(E) Power Systems. If required, alternate

power sources acceptable to the

governing body shall comply with the

requirements of NFPA 99-2015, Health

Care Facilities Code. Battery systems shall

be installed in accordance with the

requirements of Article 700, and generator

systems shall be as described in 517.30

through 517.35.

ARTICLE 520 Theaters, Audience Areas of

Motion Picture and Television Studios,

Performance Areas, and Similar Locations

ARTICLE 520 Theaters, Audience Areas of Motion

Picture and Television Studios, Performance

Areas, and Similar Locations

520.1 Definitions.

Stage Equipment. New definition.

Stage Lighting Hoist. New definition.

Stage Switchboard. New definition.

520.21 General. New section.


195


520.26 Type if Switchboard. Add-

(D) Constant Power. New section.

520.40 Stage Lighting Hoist. New section.

520.53 Construction. Add-

(B) Neutral Terminal. Section inserted.

(C) Single-Pole Separable Connectors. Section

inserted.

(D) Supply Feed-Throughs. Section inserted.

520.54 Supply Conductors.

(B) Conductor Sizing. Section inserted.

(G) Protection of Supply Conductors and

Connectors. Section inserted.

(J) Supply Neutral Conductor. Revised.

520.62 Portable Power Distribution Units.

(F) Single-Conductor Feeders. New section.

520.68 Conductor Type.

(C) Overcurrent Protection. New section.


196


520.74 Pilot Lights Required. New section.

520.68 Conductors for Portables. Add-

(3) Luminaire Supply Cords. New section.

ARTICLE 545 Manufactured Buildings

545.5 Supply Conductors. Provisions shall be

made to route the service-entrance,

underground services conductors, service-

lateral, feeder, or branch-circuit supply to

the service or building disconnecting means

conductors.

ARTICLE 550 Mobile Homes, Manufactured

Homes, and Mobile Home Parks

ARTICLE 550 Mobile Homes, Manufactured

Homes, and Mobile Home Parks

550.13 Receptacle Outlets.

(B) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI). All

125-volt, single-phase,15- and 20-ampere

receptacle outlets installed in the locations

specified in 550.13(B)(1) trough (5) shall have

GFCI protection for personnel.

(1) Outdoors, including


197


outdoors, in compartments accessible from

outside the unit, or in

(2) Bathrooms, including receptacles in

luminaires, shall have GFCI protection. GFCI

protection shall be provided for receptacle outlets

serving countertops in

(3) Kitchens, where receptacles are installed to

serve countertop surfaces

(4) Sinks, where receptacles are installed and

receptacle outlets located within 1.8 m (6 ft) of

the outer edge of the sink

(5) Dishwashers

a wet bar sink. The exceptions in 210.8(A) shall

be permitted.

Feeders supplying branch circuits shall be

permitted to be protected by a ground-fault

circuit-interrupter in lieu of the provision for such

interrupters specified herein.

550.15 Wiring Methods and Materials.

(H) Under-Chassis Wiring (Exposed to

Weather). Where outdoor or under-chassis

line-voltage (120 volts, nominal, or higher)

wiring is exposed to moisture or physical

damage, it shall be protected by a rigid metal

conduit or raceway approved for use in wet


198


locations or where subject to physical

damage. Intermediate metal conduit, except

as provided in (1) or (2). The conductors shall

be suitable for wet locations.

(1) Where closely routed against frames and

equipment enclosures, reinforced

thermosetting resin conduit

(RTRC) listed for aboveground use, Type MI

cable, electrical metallic tubing, or rigid

polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) shall be

permitted.

(2) Where extending vertically from a direct-

burial depth of at least 457 mm (18 in.)

below grade and terminated to a factory-

installed conduit or enclosure, Schedule 80

PVC or RTRC listed for exposure to physical

damage.

ARTICLE 551 Recreational Vehicles and

Recreational Vehicle Parks

551.4 General Requirements. Add-

(C) Labels. New section.

551.30 Generator Installations.

E) Supply Conductors. The supply

conductors from the engine generator to the


199


first termination on the vehicle shall be of

the stranded type and be installed in listed

flexible conduit or listed liquid tight flexible

conduit. The point of first termination shall

be in one of the following:

(1) Panelboard

(2) Junction box with a blank cover

(3) Junction box with a receptacle

(4) Enclosed transfer switch

(5) Receptacle assembly listed in conjunction

with the Generator

The panelboard, enclosed transfer switch, or

junction box with a receptacle shall be

installed within the vehicle’s interior and

within 450 mm (18 in.) of the point of entry

of the supply conductor into the vehicle.

compartment wall but not inside the

compartment. If the generator is below the

floor level and not in a compartment, the

panelboard or junction box with receptacle

shall be installed within the vehicle interior

within 450 mm (18 in.) of the point of entry

into the vehicle. A junction box with a blank

cover shall be mounted on the compartment

wall and shall be permitted inside or outside

the compartment; to A receptacle assembly

listed in conjunction with the generator shall


200


be mounted in accordance with its listing. If

the generator is below floor level and not in

a compartment, the junction box with blank

cover shall be mounted either to any part of

the generator supporting structure (but not

to the generator); or to the vehicle floor on

the outside of the vehicle; or within 450 mm

(18 in.) of the any point of entry of the

supply conductors into the vehicle. A

receptacle assembly listed in conjunction

with the generator shall be mounted in

accordance with its listing. directly above the

generator on either the inside or outside of

the floor surface. Overcurrent protection in

accordance with 240.4 shall be provided for

supply conductors as an integral part of a

listed generator or shall be located within

450 mm (18 in.) of their point of entry into

the vehicle.

552.41 Receptacle Outlets Required.

(B) Location.

(1) Adjacent to countertops in the kitchen [at

least one on each side of the sink if

countertops are on each side and are 300

mm (12 in.) or over in width and depth

(3) Adjacent to countertop spaces of 300 mm

(12 in.) or more in width and depth that

cannot be reached from a receptacle

required in 551.41(B)(1) by a cord of 1.8 m (6


201


ft) without crossing a traffic area, cooking

appliance, or sink

Add- (4) Rooftop decks that are accessible

from inside the RV shall have at least one

receptacle installed within the perimeter of

the rooftop deck. The receptacle shall not be

located more than 1.2 m (4 ft) above the

balcony, deck, or porch surface. The

receptacle shall comply with the

requirements of 406.9(B) for wet locations.

(D) Face-Up Position. A receptacle shall not

be installed in a face-up position in any

countertop or similar horizontal surface

surfaces within the living area.

551.42 Branch Circuits Required.

(C) Two to Five 15- or 20-Ampere Circuits.

Revised.

Exception No. 1: Additional 15- or 20-ampere

circuits shall be permitted where a listed

energy management system rated at 30-

ampere maximum is employed within the

system.

Exception No.2: Six 15- or 20-ampere circuits

shall be permitted without employing an

energy management system, provided that

the added sixth circuit serves only the power

converter; and the combined load of all six


202


circuits does not exceed the allowable load

that was designed for use by the original five

circuits.

551.45 Distribution Panelboard.

551.46 Means for Connecting to Power

Supply

(D) Labeling at Electrical Entrance. Each

recreational vehicle shall have a safety label

with the signal word WARNING in minimum

6-mm (1/4-in.) high letters and text in

minimum 3-mm (1/8-in) high letters on a

contrasting background. The safety label

shall be permanently affixed to the exterior

skin, at or near the point of entrance of the

power-supply cord(s), and shall read, using

one of the following warnings, as

appropriate:a label 75 mm× 45 mm (3 in. ×

13⁄4 in.) minimum size, made of etched,

metal-stamped, or embossed brass, stainless

steel, or anodized or alclad aluminum not

less than 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) thick, or other

suitable material [e.g., 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)

thick plastic laminate] that reads, as

appropriate, either

WARNING

THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 110–125-VOLT AC,

60 HZ, ____ AMPERE SUPPLY.


203


or

THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 208Y/120-VOLT or

120/240-VOLT AC, 3-POLE, 4-WIRE,

60 HZ, ______ AMPERE SUPPLY.

DO NOT EXCEED CIRCUIT RATING.

EXCEEDING THE CIRCUIT RATING MAY

CAUSE A FIRE AND RESULT IN

DEATH OF SERIOUS INJURY

The correct ampere rating shall be marked in

the blank space.


(Q) Prewiring for Air-Conditioning

Installation.

(3) A safety label with the signal word

WARNING in minimum 6-mm (1/4-in.) high

letters and body text in minimum 3-mm

(1/8-in) high letters on a contrasting

background conforming to 551.46(D) shall

be affixed placed on or adjacent to the

junction box and shall read as follows:

WARNING


204


AIR-CONDITIONING CIRCUIT.

THIS CONNECTION IS FOR AIR

CONDITIONERS

RATED 110–125-VOLT AC, 60 HZ,

___ AMPERES MAXIMUM.



CAUSE A FIRE AND RESULT IN DEATH

OR SERIOUS INJURY

An ampere rating, not to exceed 80 percent

of the circuit rating, shall be legibly marked

in the blank space.

(R) Prewiring for Generator Installation.





background label conforming to 551.46(D)

shall be affixed placed on the cover of each

junction box containing incomplete circuitry

and shall read, using one of the following

warnings, as appropriate:

WARNING


205


GENERATOR

ONLY INSTALL A GENERATOR LISTED

SPECIFICALLY FOR RV USE

HAVING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

RATED 110-125-VOLT AC,

60 HZ, ______ AMPERES MAXIMUM.

or

GENERATOR

ONLY INSTALL A GENERATOR LISTED

SPECIFICALLY FOR RV USE

HAVING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

RATED 120-240-VOLT AC,

60 HZ, _______ AMPERES MAXIMUM.

The correct ampere rating shall be legibly

marked in the

blank space.

(S) Prewiring for Other Circuits.


206






background label conforming to 551.46(D)

shall be affixed placed on or adjacent to the

junction box or device listed for the purpose

and shall read as follows:

WARNING

THIS CONNECTION IS FOR _____

RATED_____

VOLT AC, 60 HZ, _____ AMPERES

MAXIMUM.



CAUSE A FIRE AND RESULT IN DEATH OR

SERIOUS INJURY

An ampere rating not to exceed 80 percent

of the circuit rating shall be legibly marked in

the blank space.

551.53 Luminaires and Other Equipment .

(A) General. Any combustible wall or ceiling

finish exposed between the edge of a canopy


207


or pan of a luminaire or ceiling suspended

(paddle) fan canopy, or pan and the outlet

box, shall be covered with noncombustible

material or a material identified for the

purpose.

551.71 Type Receptacles Provided. Every

recreational vehicle site with electrical

supply shall be equipped with at least one

20-ampere, 125-volt receptacle. A minimum

of 20 percent of all recreational vehicle sites,

with electrical supply, shall each be equipped

with a 50-ampere, 125/250-volt receptacle

conforming to the configuration as identified

in Figure 551.46(C). Every recreational

vehicle site equipped with a 50-ampere

receptacle shall also be equipped with a 30-

ampere, 125-volt receptacle conforming to

Figure 551.46 (C)(1).These electrical supplies

shall be permitted to include additional

receptacles that have configurations in

accordance with 551.81. A minimum of 70

percent of all recreational vehicle sites with

electrical supply shall each be equipped with

a 30-ampere, 125-volt receptacle conforming

to Figure 551.46(C). This supply shall be

permitted to include additional receptacle

configurations conforming to 551.81. The

remainder of all recreational vehicle sites

with electrical supply shall be equipped with

one or more of the receptacle configurations

conforming to 551.81. Dedicated tent sites

with a 15- or 20-ampere electrical supply

551.71 Type Receptacles Provided. Revised.


208


shall be permitted to be excluded when

determining the percentage of recreational

vehicle sites with 30- or 50-ampere

receptacles.

Additional receptacles shall be permitted for

the connection of electrical equipment

outside the recreational vehicle within the

recreational vehicle park.

All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere

receptacles shall have listed ground-fault

circuit-interrupter protection for personnel.

551.72 Distribution System. Revised.

Add-

(A) Systems. New section inserted.

(B) Three-Phase Systems. New section

inserted.

551.75 Grounding. Add-

(B) Grounding Electrode. New section.

ARTICLE 552 Park Trailers

552.5 Labels. New section.

552.42 Branch-Circuit Protection. New section

and subsections.

552.46 Branch Circuits.


209


(A) Two to Five 15- or 20-Ampere Circuits. Two to

five

15- or 20-ampere circuits to supply lights,

receptacle outlets, and fixed appliances shall be

permitted. Such park trailers shall be equipped

with a distribution panelboard rated at 120 volts

maximum with a 30-ampere rated main power

supply assembly. Not more than two 120-volt

thermostatically controlled

appliances (i.e., air conditioner and water heater)

shall

be installed in such systems unless appliance

isolation switching, energy management systems,

or similar methods are used.

Exception No. 1: Additional 15- or 20-ampere

circuits shall be permitted where a listed energy

management system rated at 30 amperes

maximum is employed within the system.

Exception No. 2: Six 15- or 20-ampere circuits shall

be permitted without employing an energy

management system, provided that the added

sixth circuit serves only the power converter, and

the combined load of all six circuits does not

exceed the allowable load that was designed for

use by the original five circuits.

(I) Nonmetallic Box Without Cable Clamps.

Nonmetallic sheathed cables shall be supported

within 200 mm (8 in.) of a nonmetallic outlet box

without cable clamps. Where wiring devices with

integral enclosures are employed with a loop of

extra cable to permit future replacement of the


210


device, the cable loop shall be considered as an

integral portion of the device.

Exception: Where wiring devices with integral

enclosures

are employed with a loop of extra cable to permit

future

replacement of the device, the cable loop shall be

considered as an integral portion of the device.

(O) Method of Connecting Expandable Units.

Revised, Add-

(2) Direct Wires Connected. New section.

(Q) Prewiring for Other Circuits. New section.

552.52 Switches. Add-

(C) Location. New section.

ARTICLE 590

Temporary Installations

590.4 General.

(I) Termination(s) at Devices. Flexible cords

and cables entering enclosures containing

devices requiring termination shall be

secured to the box with fittings listed for

connecting flexible cords and cables to boxes

designed for the purpose.

(J) Support. Cable assemblies and flexible

cords and cables shall be supported in place

590.4 General.

(B) Feeders. Revised.

(C) Branch Circuits. Revised.

(G) Splices. Revised.


211


at intervals that ensure that they will be

protected from physical damage. Support

shall be in the form of staples, cable ties,

straps, or similar type fittings installed so as

not to cause damage. Cable assemblies and

flexible cords and cables installed as branch

circuits or feeders shall not be installed on

the floor or on the ground. Extension cords

shall not be required to comply with 590.4(J).

Vegetation shall not be used for support of

overhead spans of branch circuits or feeders.

Exception: For holiday lighting in accordance

with 590.3(B), where the conductors or

cables are arranged with strain relief devices,

tension take-up devices, or other approved

means to avoid damage from the movement

of the live vegetation, trees shall be

permitted to be used for support of overhead

spans of branch-circuit conductors or cables.

590.6 Ground-Fault Protection for

Personnel.

(A)(1) Receptacle Outlets Not Part of

Permanent Wiring.

All 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-

ampere receptacle outlets that are not a part

of the permanent wiring of the building or

structure and that are in use by personnel

shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter

590.6 Ground-Fault Protection for Personnel.

(B)(2) SPGFCI Protection. New section.


212


protection for personnel. Listed cord sets or

devices incorporating listed ground-fault

circuit-interrupter protection for personnel

identified for portable use shall be

permitted.

ARTICLE 600 Electric Signs and Outline

Lighting

ARTICLE 600 Electric Signs and Outline Lighting

600.2 Definitions.

Photovoltaic (PV) Powered Signs. New definition.

600.4 Markings

(E) Section Signs Installation Instructions.

Section All signs, outline lighting, skeleton

tubing systems, and retrofit kits shall be

marked to indicate that field-wiring and

installation instructions are required.

Exception: Portable, cord-connected signs

are not required to be marked.

600.4 Markings.

(B) Signs with Lampholders for Incandescent

Lamps. Revised.

600.6 Disconnects. Each sign and outline

lighting system,

feeder circuit or branch circuit supplying a

sign, outline

lighting system, or skeleton tubing shall be

controlled by an externally operable switch

or circuit breaker that opens all ungrounded

conductors and controls no other load. The

600.6 Disconnects.

(A) Location.

(1) Within Sight of the Sign At Point of Entry to a

Sign Enclosure. The disconnect shall be required

for located at a point the feeder circuit or branch

circuit(s) or feeder passing through the supplying

a sign where enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed

raceway or outline lighting system enters a sign


213


switch or circuit breaker shall open all

ungrounded conductors simultaneously on

multi-wire branch circuits in accordance with

210.4(B). Signs and outline lighting systems

located within fountains shall have the

disconnect located in accordance with

680.12.

Exception No. 1: A disconnecting means shall

not be required for an exit directional sign

located within a building.

Exception No. 2: A disconnecting means shall

not be required

for cord-connected signs with an attachment

plug.

(A) Location.

(1) Within Sight of the Sign At Point of Entry

to a Sign Enclosure. The disconnect shall be

located at a point the feeder circuit or

branch circuit(s) supplying a sign or outline

lighting system enters a sign enclosure or a

pole in accordance with 600.5(C)(3) and shall

disconnect all wiring where it enters the

enclosure of the sign or pole.

Exception: A disconnect shall not be required

for branch or feeder circuits passing through

the sign where enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed

raceway. disconnecting means shall be

within sight of the sign or outline lighting

system that it controls. Where the

disconnecting means is out of the line of

sight from any section that is able to be

enclosure or a pole in accordance with 600.5(C)(3)

and shall disconnect all wiring where it enters the

enclosure of the sign or pole.

Exception No.1: A disconnect shall not be

required for branch circuits or feeder circuits

conductor(s) passing through the sign where

enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed raceway or metal-

jacketed cable identified for the location.

Exception No. 2: A disconnect shall not be

required at the point of entry to sign enclosure or

sign body for branch circuit(s) or feeder

conductor(s) that supply an internal panelboard(s)

in a sign enclosure or sign body. Zthe conductors

shall be enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed raceway or

metal-jacketed cable identified for the location. A

field-applied permanent warning label that is

visible during servicing shall be applied to the

raceway at or near the point of entry into the sign

enclosure or sign body. The warning label shall

comply with 110.21(B) and state the following:

“Danger. This raceway contains energized

conductors.” The marking shall include the

location of the disconnecting means for the

energized conductor(s). The disconnecting means

shall be capable of being locked in the open

position in accordance with 110.25.

(2)Within Sight of the Sign. Add-

A permanent field-applied marking identifying the

location of the disconnecting means shall be

applied to the sign in a location visible during

servicing. The warning sign shall comply with

110.21(B).


214


energized, the disconnecting means shall be

capable of being locked in the open position.

The provision for locking or adding a lock to

the disconnecting means must remain in

place at the switch or circuit breaker

whether the lock is installed or not. Portable

means for adding a lock to the switch or

circuit breaker shall not be permitted.

(3)Within Sight of the Controller. Add-

Exception: Where the disconnecting means is not

located within sight of the controller, a permanent

field-applied marking identifying the location of

the disconnecting means shall be applied to the

controller in a location visible during servicing. The

warning label shall comply with 110.21(B).

600.21 Ballasts, Transformers, and

Electronic Power Supplies, and Class 2

Power Sources. Ballasts, transformers,

electronic power supplies, and Class 2 power

sources shall be of the self-contained type or

be enclosed by placement in a listed sign

body or listed separate enclosure.

600.33 Class 2 Sign Illumination Systems

Secondary Wiring. Add-

(1) General Use. New section inserted.

(2) Other Building Locations. New section

inserted.

Table 600.33(A)(1) Application of Power Limited

Cable in Signs and Outline Lighting. New table.

Table 600.33(A)(2) Class 2 Cable Substitutions.

New table.

600.34 Photovoltaic (PV) Powered Signs. New

section and subsections.


215


ARTICLE 604 Manufactured Wiring Systems


ARTICLE 605

Office Furnishings (Consisting or Lighting

Accessories and Wired Partitions)

605.2 General Definitions. Inserted.

Office Furnishings. New definition.

605.4 Partition Interconnections. The

electrical connection between partitions

office furnishings shall be a flexible assembly

identified for use with office furnishings

wired partitions or shall be permitted to be

installed using flexible cord, provided all the

following conditions are met:

(1) The cord is extra-hard usage type with 12

AWG or larger conductors, with an insulated

equipment grounding conductor.

(2) The partitions office furnishings are

mechanically contiguous.


216


(3) The cord is not longer than necessary for

maximum

positioning of the partitions office

furnishings but is in no case to exceed 600

mm (2 ft).

(4) The cord is terminated at an attachment

plug-and-cord connector with strain relief.

605.5 Lighting Accessories. Lighting

equipment shall be listed and identified for

use with wired partitions office furnishings

and shall comply with 605.5(A), (B), and (C).

(A) Support. A means for secure attachment

or support shall be provided.

(B)Connection. Where cord-and-plug

connection is provided, it shall comply with

all of the following:

(1) The cord length shall be suitable for the

intended application but shall not exceed 2.7

m (9 ft) in length.

(2) The cord shall not be smaller than 18

AWG.

(3) The cord shall contain an equipment

grounding conductor.


217


(4) Cords on the load side of a listed Class 2

power source shall not be required to

contain an equipment grounding conductor.

(5) The cord shall be of the hard usage type,

except as specified in 605.6(B)(6).

(6) A cord provided on a listed Class 2 power

source shall be of the type provided with the

listed luminaire assembly or of the type

specified in 725.130 and 725.125.

(7) Connection by other means shall be

identified as suitable for the condition of

use.

610.31 Runway Conductor Disconnecting

Means. A disconnecting means that has a

continuous ampere rating not less than that

calculated in 610.14(E) and (F) shall be

provided between the runway contact

conductors and the power supply. The

disconnecting means shall comply with

430.109. Such disconnecting means shall

consist of a motor circuit switch, circuit

breaker, or molded-case switch. This

disconnecting means shall be as follows:

(2) Lockable open in accordance with 110.25.

Capable of being locked in the open position.

The provision for locking or adding a lock to

the disconnecting means shall be installed on


218


or at the switch or circuit breaker used as the



Portable means for adding a lock to the

switch or circuit breaker shall not be

permitted as the means required to be

installed at and remain with the equipment.

Exception: The runway conductor

disconnecting means for electrolytic cell lines

shall be permitted to be placed out of view

of the runway contact conductors where

either of the following conditions are met:

(1) Where a location in view of the

contact conductors is impracticable

or introduces additional or increased

hazards to persons or property.

(2) In industrial installations, with

written safety procedures, where

conditions of maintenance and


persons service the equipment.

610.32 Disconnecting Means for Cranes and

Monorail

Hoists. A disconnecting means in compliance

with 430.109 A motor-circuit switch,

molded-case switch, or circuit breaker shall

be provided in the leads from the runway

contact conductors or other power supply on

all cranes and monorail hoists. The


219


disconnecting means shall be lockable open

in accordance with 110.25. capable of being

locked in the open position. The provision for

locking or adding a lock to the disconnecting

means shall be installed on or at the switch

or circuit breaker used as the disconnecting

means and shall remain in place with or

without the lock installed. Portable means

for adding a lock to the switch or circuit

breaker shall not be permitted.

Where a monorail hoist or hand-propelled

crane bridge

installation meets all of the following, the

disconnecting means shall be permitted to

be omitted:

(1) The unit is controlled from the ground or

floor level.

(2) The unit is within view of the power

supply disconnecting means.

(3) No fixed work platform has been

provided for servicing the unit.

Where the disconnecting means is not

readily accessible from the crane or monorail

hoist operating station, means shall be

provided at the operating station to open

the power circuit to all motors of the crane

or monorail hoist.


220


ARTICLE 620 Elevators, Dumbwaiters,

Escalators, Moving Walks, Platform Lifts,

and Stairway Chairlifts

ARTICLE 620 Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators,

Moving Walks, Platform Lifts, and Stairway

Chairlifts

620.11 Insulation of Conductors.

(A) Hoistway Door Interlock Wiring. The

conductors to the hoistway door interlocks from

the hoistway riser shall be one of the following:

(1) Flame retardant and suitable for a

temperature of not less than 200°C (392°F).

Conductors shall be Type SF or equivalent.

2) Physically protected using an approved

method, such that the conductor assembly is

flame retardant and suitable for a temperature of

not less than 2000C (3920F).

620.16 Short-Circuit Current Rating. New section

and subsections.

620.21 Wiring Methods. Add-

Exception: Cords and cables of listed cord-

and plug-connected equipment shall not be

required to be installed in a raceway.

620.23 Branch Circuits for Machine Room or

Control

Room/Machinery Space or Control Space

Lighting and

Receptacle(s).

(A) Separate Branch Circuit. The branch circuit(s)

supplying the lighting for machine rooms, control

rooms, machinery spaces, or control spaces shall


221


be separate from the branch circuit(s) supplying

the receptacle(s) in those places. These circuits

shall supply no other loads. shall supply the

machine room or control room/machinery space

or control space lighting and receptacle(s).

Required lighting shall not be connected to the

load side of a ground-fault circuit interrupter.

620.41 Suspension of Traveling Cables.

Traveling cables shall be suspended at the

car and hoistways ends, or counterweight

end where applicable, so as to reduce the

strain on the individual copper conductors to

a minimum.

Traveling cables shall be supported by one of

the following means:

(1) By their steel supporting member(s)

(2) By looping the cables around supports for

unsupported lengths less than 30 m (100 ft)

(3) By suspending from the supports by a

means that automatically tightens around

the cable when tension is increased for

unsupported lengths up to 60 m (200 ft)

620.51 Disconnecting Means.

(D)(1) Identification and Signs More Than One

Driving Machine.


222


(D)(2) Available Short-Circuit Current Field

Marking. New subsection.

(E) Surge Protection. New subsection.

620.62 Selective Coordination. Add-

Selective coordination shall be selected by a

licensed professional engineer or other

qualified person engaged primarily in the

design, installation, or maintenance of

electrical systems. The selection shall be

documented and made available to those

authorized to design, install, inspect,

maintain, and operate the system.

ARTICLE 625

625.2 Definitions.

Electric Vehicle Charging System

Cable Management System (Electric Vehicle

Supply Equipment). New definition.

Output Cable to the Electric Vehicle. New

definition.

Power-Supply Cord. New definition.

625.2 Definitions.

Charger Power Converter. New definition.

Fastened in Place. New definition.

Fixed in Place. New definition.

Portable (as applied to EVSE). New definition.

Primary Pad. New definition.

Wireless Power Transfer (WPT). New definition.


223


Wireless Power Transfer Equipment (WPTE).

New definition.

625.9 625.10 Electric Vehicle Coupler.

625.17 Cords and Cables. New section.

625.18 Interlock. Add-

An interlock shall not be required for dc

supplies less than 50 volts dc.

625.22 Personnel Protection System. The shall

have a listed system of protection against electric

shock of personnel. Where cord-and-plug-

connected electric vehicle supply equipment is

used, the interrupting device of a listed personnel

protection system shall be provided and shall be

an integral part of the attachment plug or shall be

located in the power supply cable not more than

300 mm (12 in.) from the attachment plug. A

personnel protection system shall not be required

for supplies less than 60 volts dc.

625.41 Rating. Revised.

625.44 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment

Connection. New section

625.44 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment

Connection. Equipment shall be connected

Electric vehicle supply equipment shall be

permitted to be cord- and plug-connected to the

premises wiring system in accordance with one of

the following:


224


(A) Connections to 125-Volt, Single-Phase, 15-

and 20-Ampere Receptacle Outlets Portable

Equipment. Portable Electric vehicle supply

equipment shall be connected to premises wiring

by one of the following methods: intended for

connection to

(1) A nonlocking, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding-type

receptacle outlets rated at 125 V, single phase,

15- and 20 amperes or from a supply of less than

50 volts dc.

(2) A nonlocking, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding -type

receptacle outlet rated at 60volt dc maximum, 15

or 20 amperes.

(B) Connections to Other Receptacle Outlets

Stationary Equipment. Stationary Electric vehicle

supply equipment intended to be fastened in

place in such a way as to permit ready removal for

interchange, facilitation of maintenance or repair,

or repositioning shall be connected to the

premises wiring system by one of the following

methods that is rated at 250 V maximum and

complying with all of the following:


receptacle outlet rated 125-volt or 250 volt, single

phase, up to 50 ampere It is intended for

connection to nonlocking, 2-pole, 3-wire and 3-

pole, 4-wire, grounding type receptacle outlets

rated not more than 50 amperes.


225



receptacle outlet rated 250volt, three phase, up

to 50 ampere. EVSE is fastened in place to

facilitate any of the following:

(a) Ready removal for interchange.

(b) Facilitation of maintenance and repair.

(c) Repositioning of portable, movable, or EVSE

fastened in place.

(3) Any of the receptacle outlets in 625.44(A)(1)

or (2).

Power-supply cord The length of the power

supply cord, if provided, between the receptacle

outlet and the equipment shall be in accordance

with 625.17(A)(3). for electric vehicle supply

equipment fastened in place is limited to 1.8 m (6

ft).

(4) Receptacles are located to avoid physical

damage to the flexible cord.

All other electric vehicle supply equipment shall

be permanently wired and fastened in place to

the supporting surface, a wall, a pole, or other

structure. The electric vehicle supply equipment

shall have no exposed live part.

(C) Fixed Equipment. New section.


226


625.25 625.46 Loss of Primary Source.

Means shall be provided such that, upon loss

of voltage from the utility or other electrical

system(s), energy cannot be back fed

through the electric vehicle and the supply

equipment to the premises wiring system

unless permitted by 625.26.

625.47 Multiple Feeder or Branch Circuits. New

section.

625.26 625.48 Interactive Systems. Electric

vehicle supply equipment and other parts of

a system, either on-board or off-board the

vehicle, that are intended identified for and

intended to be interconnected to a vehicle

and also serve as an optional standby system

or an electric power production source or

provide for bi-directional power feed shall be

listed and marked as suitable for that

purpose. When used as an optional standby

system, the requirements of Article 702 shall

apply, and when used as an electric power

production source, the requirements of

Article 705 shall apply.

(4) Supply Circuits. The supply circuit to the

mechanical ventilation equipment shall be

electrically interlocked with the electric

vehicle supply equipment and shall remain


227


energized during the entire electric vehicle

charging cycle. Electric vehicle supply

equipment shall be marked in accordance

with 625.15. Electric vehicle supply

equipment receptacles rated at 125 volts,

single phase, 15 and 20 amperes shall be

marked in accordance with 625.15(C) and

shall be switched, and the mechanical

ventilation system shall be electrically

interlocked through the switch supply power

to the receptacle. Electric vehicle supply

equipment supplied from less than 50 volts

dc shall be marked in accordance with

625.15(C) and shall be switched, and the

mechanical ventilation system shall be

electrically interlocked through the switch

supply power to the electric vehicle supply

equipment.

625.50 Location. Add-

This requirement does not apply to portable

electric vehicle supply equipment constructed in

accordance with 625.44(A).

ARTICLE 626 Electrified Truck Parking Spaces

626.31 Disconnecting Means and Receptacles.

(C) Rating(s).


228


(3) A 20-ampere, 1000-volt, 3-phase, 3-pole, 4-

wire receptacle, pin and sleeve.

626.32 Separable Power Supply Cable Assembly.

(A) Rating(s). Add- one of the following:

(3) A 20-ampere, 1000-volt, 3-phase.

(C) Attachment Plug(s) and Cord Connector(s).

Add- one of the following:

(3) 20-ampere, 1000-volt, 3-phase, 3-pole, 4-wire

and intended for use with a 20-ampere, 1000-

volt, 3-phase, 3-pole, 4-wire receptacles and

inlets, respectively.

ARTICLE 640 Audio Signal Processing,

Amplification, and Reproduction Equipment

ARTICLE 640 Audio Signal Processing,

Amplification, and Reproduction Equipment

640.1 Scope.

(A) Covered. This article covers equipment

and wiring for audio signal generation,

recording, processing, amplification and

reproduction; distribution of sound; public

address; speech input systems; temporary

audio system installations; and electronic

organs or other electronic musical


229


instruments. This also includes audio

systems subject to Article 517, Part VI, and

Articles 518, 520, 525, and 530.

(B)Not Covered. This article does not cover

the installation and wiring of fire and

burglary alarm signaling devices.

640.3 Locations and Other Articles.

(B) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling

Spaces.

Add- Exception No. 1: Class 2 and Class 3 cables

installed in accordance with 725.135(B) and Table

725.154 shall be permitted to be installed in ducts

specifically fabricated for environmental air.

Exception No. 2: Class 2 and Class 3 cables

installed in accordance with 725.135(C) and Table

725.154 shall be permitted to be installed in other

spaces used for environmental air (plenums).

ARTICLE 645 Information Technology

Equipment

ARTICLE 645 Information Technology Equipment

645.3 Other Articles.

(B) Plenums Wiring and cabling in Other Spaces

Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). Revised.

(E) Fire Alarm Cables and Equipment. Add-


230


Only fire alarm cables listed in accordance with

Part IV of Article 760 and listed fire alarm

equipment shall be permitted to be installed in an

information technology equipment room.

(F) Cable Routing Assemblies, Communications

Wires, Cables, Raceways, and Equipment. Parts I,

II, III, IV, and

V of Article 800 shall apply to cable routing

assemblies, communications wires, cables,

raceways, and equipment installed in an

information technology equipment room. Only

communication wires and cables listed in

accordance with 800.179, cable routing

assemblies, and communications equipment

listed in accordance with 800.170 shall be

permitted to be installed in an information

technology equipment room. Article 645 shall

apply to the powering of communications

equipment in an information technology

equipment room.

(F) Community Antenna Television and Radio

Distribution Systems Cables and

Equipment. Parts I, II, III, IV, and V of

Article 820 shall apply to community

antenna television and radio distribution

systems cables and equipment installed in

an information technology equipment

room. Only communication antenna

television and radio distribution cables

listed in accordance with 820.179 and

listed CATV equipment shall be permitted

to be installed in an information


231


technology equipment room. Article 645

shall apply to the powering of community

antenna television and radio distribution

systems equipment installed in an

information technology equipment room.

(H)Optical Fiber Cables. New subsection.

645.4 Special Requirements for Information

Technology

Equipment Room. This article shall be

permitted to provide alternate wiring

methods to the provisions of Chapters 1

through 4 Chapter 3 and Article 708 for

power wiring, Parts I and III of Article 725

725.154 for signaling wiring, and Parts I and

V of Article 770 770.113© and Table

770.154(a) for optical fiber cabling when

where all of the following conditions are

met:

A separate heating/ventilating/air-

conditioning (HVAC) system is provided in

one of the methods identified in 645.492) a

or b.

a. That is dedicated for information

technology equipment use and is

separated from other areas of

occupancy, or


232


b. An HVAC system that serves other

occupancies and meets all of the

following:

i. Also serves the information

technology equipment room.

ii. Provides fire/smoke dampers

at the point of penetration of

the room boundary.

iii. Activates the damper

operation upon initiation by

smoke detector alarms, by

operation of the

disconnecting means required

by 645.10, or by both. Any

HVAC system that serves

other occupancies shall be

permitted to also serve the

information technology

equipment room if fire/smoke

dampers are provided at the

point of penetration of the

room boundary. Such

dampers shall operate on

activation of smoke detectors

and by operation of the

disconnecting means required

by 645.10.

645.5 Supply Circuits and Interconnecting Cables.

(E) Under Raised Floors. Revised.


233


Table 645.10(B)(5) Cables Installed Under Raised

Floors. New table.

645.14 System Grounding. New section.

645.18 Surge Protection for Critical Operations

Data Systems. New section.

645.27 Selective Coordination. New section.

ARTICLE 646 Module Data Centers. New

article.

ARTICLE 646 Module Data Centers. New article.


(B) Plenums Wiring and Cabling in Other Spaces

Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). Revised.

(E) Fire Alarm Equipment. The provisions of Parts

I, II, and III of Article 760 shall apply to fire alarm

systems, cables, and equipment installed in an

MDC, when provided. Only fire alarm cables listed

in accordance with Part IV of Article 760 and

listed fire alarm equipment shall be permitted to

be installed in an MDC.

(F) Cable Routing Assemblies and

Communications Wires, cables, Raceways, and

Equipment. Parts I, II, III, IV, and V of Article 800

shall apply to cable routing systems

communications wires, cables, raceways, and


234


equipment installed in an MDC. Only

communications wires and cables listed in

accordance with Part IV of Article 760 and listed

fire alarm equipment shall be permitted to be

installed in an MDC.

(G) Community Antenna Television and Radio

Distribution Systems Cables and Equipment.

Parts I, II, III, IV, and V of Article 820 shall apply to

community antenna television and radio

distribution systems equipment installed in an

MDC. Only community antenna television and

radio distribution cables listed in accordance with

820.179 and listed CATV equipment shall be

permitted to be installed in an MDC.


(B) MDCs Connected to Branch Circuits and

Feeders. Add-

Exception: This requirement shall not apply to

listed and labeled equipment connected to branch

circuits located inside of the MDC equipment

enclosure.

ARTICLE 647 Sensitive Electronic Equipment

647.6 Grounding.

(A) General. The transformer secondary

center tap of the 60/120-volt, 3-wire system


235


shall be grounded as provided in 250.30 as a

separately derived single-phase, 3-wire

system.

ARTICLE 650 Pipe Organs

650.2 Definitions. New Section.

650.5 Grounding or Double Insulation of the DC

Power Supply. The installation of dc power supply

shall comply with either of the following:

(1) The dc power supply shall be double insulated.

(2) The metallic case of the dc power supply shall

be bonded to the input equipment grounding

conductor.

rectifier shall be bonded to the equipment

grounding conductor according to the provisions

in Article 250, Parts V, VI, VII, and VIII.

650.7 Installation of Conductors. Cables shall be

securely

fastened in place and shall be permitted to be

attached directly to the organ structure without

insulating supports. Cables Splices shall not be

required to be enclosed in boxes or other

enclosures. Control equipment and busbars

connecting common-return conductors shall be

permitted to be attached directly to the organ

structure without insulation supports. placed in

contact with other conductors. Abandoned cables


236


that are not terminated at equipment shall be

identified with a tag of sufficient durability to


650.9 Protection from Accidental Contact. New

section.

ARTICLE 660 X-Ray Equipment

660.5 Disconnecting Means. Add-

Exception: The disconnecting means for the X-ray

equipment shall not be required under either of

the following conditions, provided that the

controller disconnecting means is lockable in

accordance with 110.25:

(1) Where such a location of the disconnection

means for the X-ray equipment is

impracticable or introduces additional or

increased hazards to persons or property.

(2) In industrial installations, with written

safety procedures, where conditions of

maintenance and supervision ensure that

only qualified persons service the

equipment.

ARTICLE 670 Industrial Machinery



237


(1) Industrial machinery shall not be installed

where the available fault short-circuit current

exceeds its short-circuit current rating as marked

in accordance with 670.3(A)(4).

(2) Industrial machinery shall be legibly marked in

the field with the maximum available short-circuit

current. The field marking(s) shall include the date

the short-circuit current calculation was

performed and be of sufficient durability to


670.7 Surge Protection. New section.

ARTICLE 680 Swimming Pool, Fountains, and

Similar Installations

ARTICLE 680 Swimming Pool, Fountains, and

Similar Installations

680.2 Definitions.

Electrically Powered Pool Lift. New definition.

608.7 Grounding and Bonding Terminals. New

section.

680.10 680.11 Underground Wiring Location.

Underground wiring shall be permitted not be

permitted under the pool or within the area

extending 1.5 m (5 ft) horizontally from the inside

wall of the pool unless this wiring is necessary to

supply pool equipment permitted by this article.

Where space limitations prevent wiring from

being routed a distance 1.5 m (5 ft) or more from

the pool, such wiring shall be permitted where


238


installed in complete raceway systems of rigid

metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid

polyvinyl chloride conduit, reinforced

thermosetting resin conduit, or Type MC cable, or

a nonmetallic raceway system. All metal conduit

shall be corrosion resistant and suitable for the

location. Underground wiring shall not be

permitted under the pool unless this wiring is

necessary to supply pool equipment permitted by

this article. The Minimum cover depth shall be as

given in Table 680.10 300.5.

680.11 680.12 Equipment Rooms and Pits.

Revised.

680.14 Corrosive Environment. New section and

subsections.

680.22 Lighting, Receptacles, and

Equipment.

(B) Luminaires, Lighting Outlets, and Ceiling-

Suspended (Paddle) Fans.

(6) Low-Voltage Luminaires. New section.

680.22 Lighting, Receptacles, and Equipment.

(B)(7) Low-voltage Gas-Fired Luminaires,

Decorative Fireplaces, Fire Pits, and Similar

Equipment. Insert new subsection.

680.26 Equipotential Bonding.

(C) Pool Water. Revised.

680.27 Specialized Pool Equipment.

(B)(1) Motors and Controllers. Add-

Exception: Motors that are part of listed systems

with ratings not exceeding the low-voltage


239


contact limit that are supplied by listed

transformers or power supplies that comply with

680.23(A)(2) shall be permitted to be located less

than 1.5 m (5 ft) from the inside walls of the pools.

(B)(2) Protection. Add-

Exception: Motors that are part of listed systems

with ratings not exceeding the low-voltage

contact limit that are supplied by listed

transformers or power supplies that comply with

680.23(A)(2).

680.28 Gas-Fired Water Heater. New section.

III. Storable Pools, Storable Spas, and

Storable Hot Tubs. Revised- add “Storable

Spas and Storable Hot Tubs” to all references

to Storable Pools.

680.42 Outdoor Installations.

A. Flexible Connections.

(1) Flexible Conduit. Liquidtight flexible

metal conduit or

liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall

be permitted in lengths of not more than 1.8

m (6 ft) external to the spa or hot tub

enclosure in addition to the length needed

within the enclosure to make the electrical

connection.


240


(2) Cord-and-Plug Connections.

(B) Bonding. Bonding by metal-to-metal

mounting on a common frame or base shall

be permitted. The metal bands or hoops

used to secure wooden staves shall not be

required to be bonded as required in 680.26.

Equipotential bonding of perimeter surfaces

in accordance with 680.26(B)(2) shall not be

required to be provided for spas and hot

tubs where all of the following conditions

apply:

(1) The spa or hot tub shall be listed as a

self-contained spa for aboveground

use.

(2) The spa or hot tub shall not be

identified as suitable only for indoor

use.

(3) The installation shall be in


instructions and shall be located on

or above grade.

(4) The top rim of the spa or hot tub shall

be at least 710 mm (28 in.) above all

perimeter surfaces that are within

760 mm (30 in.) measured

horizontally from the spa or hot tub.

The height of nonconductive external

steps for entry to or exit from the

self-contained spa shall not be used


241


to reduce or increase this rim height

measurement.

680.43 Indoor Installation. Add-

Exception No. 3: For a dwelling unit(s) only,

where a listed spa or hot tub is installed

indoors, the wiring method requirements of

680.42(C) shall also apply.

680.74 Bonding. Revised-

(A) General. The following parts shall be bonded

together:

(1) All metal fittings within or attached to the tub

structure that are in contact with the circulating

water.

(2) Metal parts of electrical equipment associated

with the tub water circulating system, including

pump and blower motors.

(3) Metal-sheathed cables and raceways and

metal piping that are within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the

inside walls of the tub and not separated from the

tub by a permanent barrier.

(4) All exposed metal surfaces that are within 1.5

m (5 ft) of the inside walls of the tub and not

separated from the tub area by a permanent

barrier.

(5) Electrical devices and controls that are not

associated with the hydromassage tubs and that

are located within 1.5 m (5 ft) from such units.

Exception No. 1: Small conductor surfaces not

likely to become energized, such as air and water

jets, supply valve assemblies, and drain fittings

not connected to metallic piping, and towel bars,


242


mirror frames, and similar nonelectrical

equipment not connected to metal framing shall

bot be required to be bonded.

Exception No. 2: Double-insulated motors and

blowers shall not be bonded.

(B)Metal parts required to be bonded by this

section shall be Both metal piping systems and

grounded metal parts in contact with the

circulating water shall be bonded together using a

solid copper bonding jumper, insulated, covered,

or bare, not smaller than 8 AWG. The bonding

jumper(s) shall be connected to the terminal on

the circulating pump motor that is intended for

this purpose. The bonding jumper shall not be

required to be connected to a double insulated

circulating pump motor. The 8 AWG or larger solid

copper bonding jumper shall be required for

equipotential bonding in the area of the

hydromassage bathtub and shall not be required

to be extended or attached to any remote

panelboard, service equipment, or any electrode.

In all installations a The 8 AWG or larger solid

copper bonding jumper shall be long enough to

terminate on a replacement non-double-insulated

pump or blower motor shall be provided

and shall be terminated to the equipment

grounding conductor of the branch circuit of the

motor when a double-insulated circulating pump

or blower motor is used.

Part VIII. Electrically Powered Pool Lifts. New

part, sections and subsections.


243


ARTICLE 690 Solar Photovoltaic (PV)

Systems

ARTICLE 690 Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Systems

690.2 Definitions.

DC-to-DC Converter: New definition.

Direct-Current (dc) Combiner. New

definition.

Multimode Inverter. New definition.

690.2 Definitions.

DC-to-DC Converter Output Circuit: New

definition.

DC-to-DC Converter Source Circuit: New

definition.

Generating Capacity: New definition.

Interactive Inverter Output Circuit: New

definition.

Photovoltaic System DC Circuit: New definition.

690.4 Installation General Requirements.

(D) (B) Equipment. Inverters, motor

generators, photovoltaic PV modules,

photovoltaic PV panels, ac photovoltaic PV

modules, dc combiners, dc-to-dc converters,

source-circuit combiners, and charge

controllers intended for use in photovoltaic

690.4 General Requirements.

(D) Multiple Inverters PV Systems.

(E) Locations Not Permitted. New section.


244


PV power systems shall be identified and

listed for the PV application.

(C) Qualified Personnel. New section.

H) (D) Multiple Inverters. A PV system shall

be permitted to have multiple utility-

interactive inverters installed in or on a

single building or structure. Where the

inverters are remotely located from each

other, a directory in accordance with 705.10

shall be installed at each dc PV system

disconnecting means, at each ac

disconnecting means, and at the main

service disconnecting means showing the

location of all ac and dc PV system

disconnecting means in the building.

Exception: A directory shall not be required

where all inverters and PV dc disconnecting

means are grouped atthe main service


690.5 Ground-Fault Protection. Grounded dc

photovoltaic PV arrays shall be provided with

dc ground-fault protection meeting the

requirements of 690.5(A) through (C) to

reduce fire hazards. Ungrounded dc

photovoltaic PV arrays shall comply with

690.35.

Exception No. 1: Ground-mounted or pole-

mounted photovoltaic arrays with not more


245


than two paralleled source circuits and with

all dc source and dc output circuits isolated

from buildings shall be permitted without

groundfault protection.

Exception No. 2: Photovoltaic arrays installed

at other than dwelling units shall be

permitted without ground-fault protection if

each equipment grounding conductor is sized

in accordance with 690.45.

(A) Ground-Fault Detection and

Interruption. The ground-fault protection

device or system shall:

(1) Be capable of detecting a ground

fault in the PV array dc current-

carrying conductors and components,

including any intentionally grounded

conductors.

(2) Interrupt the flow of fault current.

(3) Provide an indication of the fault, and

(4) Be listed for providing PV ground-

fault protection.

be capable of detecting a ground-fault

current, interrupting the flow of fault

current, and providing an indication of the

fault.

Automatically opening the grounded

conductor for measurement purposes or of

the faulted circuit to interrupt the ground-


246


fault current path shall be permitted. If a

grounded conductor is opened to interrupt

the ground-fault current path, all conductors

of the faulted circuit shall be automatically

and simultaneously opened.

Manual operation of the main PV dc

disconnect shall not activate the ground-

fault protection device or result in grounded

conductors becoming ungrounded.

(C) Labels and Markings. A warning label

shall appear on the utility-interactive

inverter or be applied by the installer near

the ground-fault indicator at a visible

location, stating the following:

WARNING

ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD

IF A GROUND FAULT IS INDICATED,

NORMALLY GROUNDED CONDUCTORS

MAY BE UNGROUNDED AND ENERGIZED

When the photovoltaic PV system also has

batteries, the same warning shall also be

applied by the installer in a visible location at

the batteries. The warning sign(s) or label(s)

shall comply with 110.2(B).

690.7 Maximum Voltage. The maximum voltage

of PV system dc circuits shall be the highest


247


voltage between any two circuit conductors or

any conductor and ground. PV System dc circuits

on or in one- and two-family dwellings shall be

permitted to have a maximum voltage of 600

volts or less. PV system dc circuits on or in other

types of buildings shall be permitted to have

maximum voltage of 1000 volts or less. Where not

located on or in buildings, listed dc PV equipment,

rated at maximum voltage of 1500 volts or less,

shall not be required to comply with Parts II and

III of Article 490.

(A) Maximum Photovoltaic Source and Output

Circuits System Voltage. In a dc photovoltaic

source circuit or output circuit, the maximum

photovoltaic system voltage for that circuit shall

be calculated in accordance with one of the

following methods:

(1) Instructions in listing or labeling of the

module: as the sum of the PV module rated open-

circuit voltage of the series-connected

photovoltaic modules corrected for the lowest

expected ambient temperature using the open-

circuit voltage temperature coefficients in

accordance with the instructions included in the

listing or labeling of the module.

(2) Crystalline and mutlicrystalline modules: For

crystalline and multicrystalline silicon modules,

the rated open-circuit voltage shall be multiplied

by the correction factor provided in Table 690.7.

(3) PV systems of 100 kW or larger: For PV

systems with a generating capacity of 100 kW or

greater, a documented and stamped PV design,


248


using an industry standard method and provided

by a licensed professional electrical engineer,

shall be permitted.

The maximum voltage shall be used to determine

the voltage, rating of conductors, cables,

disconnects, overcurrent devices, and other

equipment.

This voltage shall be used to determine the

voltage rating of cables, disconnects, overcurrent

devices, and other equipment. Where the lowest

expected ambient temperature is below −40°C

(−40°F), or where other than crystalline or

multicrystalline silicon photovoltaic modules are

used, the system voltage adjustment shall be

made in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions. When open-circuit voltage

temperature coefficients are supplied in the

instructions for listed PV modules, they shall be

used to calculate the maximum photovoltaic

system voltage as required by 110.3(B) instead of

using

(B) Direct-Current Utilization Circuits DC-to-DC

Source and Output Circuits. In a dc-to-dc

converter source and output circuit, the

maximum voltage shall be calculated in

accordance with 690.7(B)(1) or (B)(2)The voltage

of dc

utilization circuits shall conform to 210.6.

(1) Single DC-to-DC Converter. For circuits

connected to the output of a single dc-to-

dc converter, the maximum voltage shall


249


be the maximum rated voltage output of

the dc-to-dc converter.

(2) Two or more Series Connected DC-To-DC

Converters. For circuits connecting the

output of two or more series-connected

dc-to-dc converters, the maximum voltage

shall be determined in accordance with

the instructions included in the listing or

labeling of the dc-to-dc converter. If these

instructions do not state the rated voltage

of the series-connected dc-to-dc

converters, the maximum voltage shall be

the sum of the maximum rated voltage

output of the dc-to-dc converters in series.

(C) Photovoltaic Source and Output Circuits. In

one and

two-family dwellings, photovoltaic source circuits

and

photovoltaic output circuits that do not include

lampholders, fixtures, or receptacles shall be

permitted to have a maximum photovoltaic

system voltage up to 600 volts. Other installations

with a maximum photovoltaic system voltage

over 600 volts shall comply with Article 690, Part

IX.

(D) Circuits over 150 Volts to Ground. In one- and

two family dwellings, live parts in photovoltaic

source circuits and photovoltaic output circuits

over 150 volts to ground shall not be accessible to

other than qualified persons while energized.

(E) (C) Bipolar Source and Output Circuits. For 2-

wire dc circuits connected to bipolar PV arrays,


250


systems, the maximum system voltage shall be

the highest voltage between the 2-wire circuit

conductors where one conductor of the 2-wire

circuit is connected to the functional ground

reference (center tap). To prevent overvoltage in

the event of a ground-fault or arc-fault, the array

shall be isolated from the ground reference and

isolated into two 2-wire circuits. if all of the

following conditions apply:

(1) One conductor of each circuit of a bipolar

subarray is

solidly grounded.

Exception: The operation of ground-fault or arc-

fault devices (abnormal operation) shall be

permitted to interrupt this connection to ground

when the entire bipolar array becomes two

distinct arrays isolated from each other and the

utilization equipment.

(2) Each circuit is connected to a separate

subarray.

(3) The equipment is clearly marked with a label

as follows:

WARNING

BIPOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ARRAY.

DISCONNECTION OF NEUTRAL

OR GROUNDED CONDUCTORS

MAY RESULT IN OVERVOLTAGE

ON ARRAY OR INVERTER.

609.8 Circuit Size and Current.

(A) Calculation of Maximum Circuit Current.

609.8 Circuit Sizing and Current.


251


(5) DC-to-DC Converter Output Current.

New section.

(B) Ampacity and Overcurrent Device

Ratings Conductor Ampacity. Photovoltaic

PV system currents shall be considered to be

continuous. Circuit conductors shall be sized

to carry not less than the larger of

690.8(B)(1) or (2).

(1) One hundred and twenty-five percent of

the maximu currents calculated in 690.8(A)

before the application of adjustment and

correction factors. Overcurrent Devices.

Overcurrent devices, where required, shall

be rated as required by 690.8(B)(1)(a)

through (1)(d).

(a) To carry not less than 125 percent of the

maximum

currents calculated in 690.8(A).

Exception: Circuits containing an assembly,

together with its overcurrent device(s), that

is listed for continuous operation at 100

percent of its rating shall be permitted to be

used at 100 percent of its rating.

(b) Terminal temperature limits shall be in

accordance with 110.3(B) and 110.14(C).

(A)(6) DC-to-DC Converter Output Circuit

Current. New subsection.

(B)(3) Adjustable Electronic Overcurrent

Protective Device. New subsection.


252


(c) Where operated at temperatures greater

than 40°C (104°F), the manufacturer’s

temperature correction factors shall apply.

(d) The rating or setting of overcurrent

devices shall be permitted in accordance

with 240.4(B), (C), and (D).

(2) Conductor Ampacity. Circuit conductors

shall be sized o carry not less than the larger

of 690.8(B)(2)(a) or (2)(b).

(a) One hundred and twenty-five percent of

the maximum currents calculated in 690.8(A)

without any additional correction factors for

conditions of use.

(b) The maximum currents calculated in

690.8(A) after conditions of use have been

applied.

(c) The conductor selected, after the

application of adjustment and correction

factors conditions of use, shall be protected

by the overcurrent protective device, where

required.


(A) Circuits and Equipment. Photovoltaic PV

source circuit, photovoltaic PV output circuit,

inverter output circuit, and storage battery

circuit conductors and equipment shall be


(B) Overcurrent Device Rating. Overcurrent

device(s) used in PV system dc circuits shall be

listed for use in PV systems. Overcurrent devices,


253


protected in accordance with the

requirements of Article 240. Protection

devices for PV source circuits and PV output

circuits shall be in accordance with the

requirements of 690.9(B) through (E).

Circuits, either ac or dc, connected to

current-limited supplies (e.g., PV modules, ac

output of utility-interactive inverters), and

also connecter to sources having significantly

higher current availability (e.g., parallel

strings of modules, utility power), shall be

protected at the source from overcurrent.re

than one electrical source shall have

overcurrent devices located so as to provide

overcurrent protection from all sources.

Exception: An overcurrent device shall not be

required for

PV modules or PV source circuit conductors

sized in accordance with 690.8(B) where one

of the following applies:

(a) There are no external sources such as

parallel connected source circuits, batteries,

or backfeed from inverters.

(b) The short-circuit currents from all sources

do not exceed the ampacity of the

conductors or the maximum overcurrent

protective device size specified on the PV

module nameplate.

where required, shall be rated in accordance with


(1) ratings shall be Not less than 125 percent of

the maximum current calculated in 690.8(A).

(2) Exception: Circuits containing An assembly,

together with its overcurrent device(s), that is

listed for continuous operation at 100 percent of

its rating shall be permitted to be used at 100

percent of its rating.

(3) Adjustable electronic overcurrent protective

devices rated or set in accordance with 240.6.

(D) (C) Photovoltaic Source and Output Circuits.

A single overcurrent protective device, where

required, shall be permitted to protect the PV

modules and conductors of each source circuit or

the conductors of each output circuit. Where

single overcurrent protection devices are used to

protect PV source or output circuits, all

overcurrent devices shall be places in the same

polarity for all circuits within a PV system. PV

overcurrent devices shall be required to provide

overcurrent protection in PV source and output

circuits. The overcurrent devices shall be

accessible but shall not be required to be readily

accessible.


254


(B)Overcurrent Device Ratings. New section

inserted.

Power Transformers. Overcurrent

protection for a

transformer with a source(s) on each side

shall be provided in accordance with 450.3

by considering first one side of the

transformer, then the other side of the

transformer, as the primary.

Exception: A power transformer with a

current rating on the side connected toward

the utility-interactive inverter output, not less

than the rated continuous output current of

the inverter, shall be permitted without

overcurrent protection from the inverter.

(D) (C) Direct-Current Rating. Overcurrent

devices, either fuses or circuit breakers, used

in any dc portion of a photovoltaic PV power

system shall be listed for use in dc circuits

and shall have the appropriate voltage,

current, and interrupt ratings.

(D) (D) Photovoltaic Source and Output

Circuits. Revised.

(E) Series Overcurrent Protection. In

grounded PV source circuits, a single

overcurrent protection device, where

required, shall be permitted to


255


protect the PV modules and the

interconnecting conductors. In

ungrounded PV source circuits

complying with 690.35, an

overcurrent protection device, where

required, shall be installed in each

ungrounded circuit conductor and

shall be permitted to protect the PV

modules and the interconnecting

cables.

690.10 Stand-Alone Systems. Revised.

690.12 Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on

Buildings. New section.

690.12 Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on

Buildings.

Add- Exception: Ground mounted PV system

circuits that enter buildings, of which the sole

purpose is to house PV system equipment, shall

not be required to comply with 690.12.

(A) Controlled Conductors. New section.

(B) Controlled Limits. New section.

(C) Initiation Device. New section.

(D) Equipment. New section.

690.13 All Conductors Building or Other

Structures Supplied by a Photovoltaic

System. Revised.

690.13 Building or Other Structures Supplied by a

Photovoltaic System Disconnecting Means.

Revised.

690.15 Disconnection of Photovoltaic

Equipment. Means shall be provided to

disconnect equipment, such as inverters,

690.15 Disconnection of Photovoltaic

Equipment. Isolating devices Means shall be

provided to isolate PV modules, ac PV modules,


256


batteries, and charge controllers, and the

like, from all ungrounded conductors of all

sources. If the equipment is energized from

more than one source, the disconnecting

means shall be grouped and identified.

A single disconnecting means in accordance

with 690.17 shall be permitted for the

combined ac output of one or more inverters

or ac modules in an interactive system.

(A) Utility-Interactive Inverters Mounted

in Not Readily Accessible Locations.

Utility-interactive inverters shall be

permitted to be mounted on roofs or

other exterior areas that are not

readily accessible and shall comply

with 690.15(A)(1) through (4):

(1) A dc PV disconnecting means shall

be mounted within sight of or in

each inverter.

(2) An ac disconnect means shall be

mounted within sight of or in

each inverter.

(3) The ac output conductors from

the inverter and an additional ac

disconnecting means for the

inverter shall comply with

690.13(A).

(4) A plague shall be installed in


(B) Equipment. Equipment such as PV

source circuit isolating switches,

fuses, dc-to-dc converters inverters, and

disconnect equipment, such as inverters,

batteries, and charge controllers, from all

ungrounded conductors that are not solidly

grounded. An equipment disconnecting means or

a PV system disconnecting means shall be

permitted in place of an isolating device. Where

the maximum circuit current is greater than 30

amperes for the output circuit of a dc combiner or

the input circuit of a charge controller or inverter,

an equipment disconnecting means shall be

provided for isolation. Where a charge controller

or inverter has multiple input circuits, a single

equipment disconnecting means shall be

permitted to isolate the equipment from the

input circuits of all sources. If the equipment is

energized from more than one source, the

disconnecting means shall be grouped and

identified. A single disconnecting means in

accordance with 690.17 shall be permitted for the

combined ac output of one or more inverters or

ac modules in an interactive system.

(A) Utility-Interactive Inverters Mounted in

Not Readily Accessible Locations. Isolating

devices or equipment disconnecting

means shall be installed in circuits

connected to equipment at a location

within the equipment, or within sight and

within 3 m (10 ft) of the equipment, An

equipment disconnecting means shall be

permitted to be remote from the

equipment where the equipment


257


overcurrent devices, dc-to-dc

converters, and blocking diodes shall

be permitted on the PV side of the PV


(C) Direct-Current Combiner

Disconnects. The dc output of dc

combiners mounted on roofs of

dwellings or other buildings shall

have a load break disconnecting

means located in the combiner or

within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the combiner.

The disconnecting means shall be

permitted to be remotely controlled

but shall be manually operable locally

when control power is not available.

disconnecting means can be remotely

operated from within 3 m (10 ft) of the

equipment. Utility-interactive inverters

shall be permitted to be mounted on roofs

or other exterior areas that are not readily

accessible and shall comply with

690.15(A)(1) through (4):

(1) A dc PV disconnecting means shall be

mounted within sight of or in each

inverter.

(2) An ac disconnect means shall be

mounted within sight of or in each

inverter.

(3) The ac output conductors from the

inverter and an additional ac

disconnecting means for the inverter

shall comply with 690.13(A).

(4) A plague shall be installed in


(B) Equipment Interrupting Rating. New

section. Equipment such as PV source

circuit isolating switches, overcurrent

devices, dc-to-dc converters, and blocking

diodes shall be permitted on the PV side of

the PV disconnecting means.

(C) Direct-Current Combiner Disconnects

Isolating Device. New section. The dc

output of dc combiners mounted on roofs

of dwellings or other buildings shall have a

load break disconnecting means located in

the combiner or within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the

combiner. The disconnecting means shall


258


be permitted to be remotely controlled

but shall be manually operable locally

when control power is not available.

(D) Equipment Disconnecting Means. New

section.

690.17 Switch or Circuit Breaker Disconnect

Type. Revised.

690.31 Methods Permitted.

(B) Identification and Grouping. New

section.

(B) (C) Single-Conductor Cable.

(1) General. Single-conductor cable type

USE-2, and single-conductor cable listed and

labeled as photovoltaic (PV) wire shall be

permitted in exposed outdoor locations in

photovoltaic PV source circuits for

photovoltaic PV module interconnections

within the photovoltaic PV array.

Exception: Raceways shall be used when

required by

690.31(A).

(2) Cable Tray. New section.

(D) Multiconductor Cable. New section.

690.31 Methods Permitted.

(A) Wiring Systems. Add-

For ambient temperatures exceeding 300C (860F),

conductor ampacities shall be corrected in

accordance with Table 690.31(A).


259


(G) Direct-Current Photovoltaic Source and

Direct-Current Output Circuits Inside on or a

Building.

(1) Embedded in Building Surfaces. New

section.

(4) Marking and Labeling Methods and

Locations. The labels or markings shall be

visible after installation. The labels shall be

reflective, and all letters shall be capitalized

and shall be a minimum height of 9.5 mm

(3/8 in) in white in a red background.

Photovoltaic PV power circuit labels shall

appear on every section of the wiring system

that is separated by enclosures, walls,

partitions, ceilings, or floors. Spacing

between labels or markings, or between a

label and a marking, shall not be more than 3

m (10 ft). Labels required by this section shall

be suitable for the environment where they

are installed.

(I)Bipolar Photovoltaic Systems. New

section.

(J) Module Connection Arrangement. New

section.

Table 690.31(A) Correction Factors. New table.

Table 690.31(E) Minimum PV Wire Strands. New

table.


260


690.35 Ungrounded Photovoltaic Power

Systems.

(C) Ground-Fault Protection. All photovoltaic

PV source and output circuits shall be

provided with a ground-fault protection

device or system that complies with (1)

through (4):

(1) Detects a ground fault(s) in the PV array

dc current-carrying conductors and

components.

(2) Indicates that a ground fault has occurred

(3) Automatically disconnects all conductors

or causes the inverter or charge controller

connected to the faulted circuit to

automatically cease supplying power to

output circuits.

(4) Is listed for providing PV ground-fault

protection.

(D) Conductors. The photovoltaic PV source

conductors shall consist of the following:

(1) Metallic or nonmetallic jacketed

multiconductor cables

(2) Conductors installed in raceways, or


261


(3) Conductors listed and identified as

Photovoltaic (PV) wire installed as exposed,

single conductors.

(4)Conductors that are direct-buried and

identified for direct-burial use.

690.41 System Grounding. Photovoltaic

systems shall comply with one of the

following:

(1) Ungrounded systems shall comply with

690.35.

(2) Grounded two-wire systems shall have

one conductor grounded or be impedance

grounded, and the system shall comply with

690.5.

(3) Grounded bipolar systems shall have

For a photovoltaic power source, one

conductor of a 2-wire system with a

photovoltaic system voltage over 50 volts

and the reference (center tap) conductor

grounded or be impedance grounded, and

the system shall comply with 690.5.

(4)of a bipolar system shall be solidly

grounded or shall use Other methods that

accomplish equivalent system protection in

accordance with 250.4(A) with and that

690.41 System Grounding. Revised.


262


utilize equipment listed and identified for

the use shall be permitted to be used.

Exception: Systems complying with 690.35.


Conductors. Equipment grounding

conductors for photovoltaic PV source and

photovoltaic PV output circuits shall be sized

in accordance with 690.45(A) or (B) 250.122.

Where no overcurrent protective device is

used in the circuit, an assumed overcurrent

device rated at the PV maximum circuit

current shall be used when applying Table

250.122. Increases in equipment grounding

conductor size to address voltage drop

considerations shall not be required. An

equipment grounding conductor shall not be

smaller than 14 AWG.

690.46 Array Equipment Grounding

Conductors. For PV modules equipment

grounding conductors smaller for

photovoltaic modules smaller than 6 AWG

shall comply with 250.120(C).

Where installed in raceways, equipment

grounding conductors and grounding

electrode conductors not larger than 6 AWG

shall be permitted to be solid.

690.47 Grounding Electrode System 690.47 Grounding Electrode System. Revised.


263


(B) Direct-Current Systems. If installing a dc

system, a grounding electrode system shall

be provided in accordance with 250.166 for

grounded systems or 250.169 for

ungrounded systems. The grounding

electrode conductor shall be installed in


A common dc grounding-electrode

conductor shall be permitted to serve

multiple inverters. The size of the common

rounding electrode and the tap conductors

shall be in accordance with 250.166. The tap

conductors shall be connected to the

common grounding-electrode conductor by

exothermic welding or with connectors listed

as grounding and bonding equipment in such

a manner that the common grounding

electrode conductor remains without a splice

or joint.

An ac equipment grounding system shall be

permitted to be used for equipment

grounding of inverters and other equipment

and for the ground-fault detection reference

for ungrounded PV systems.

(C) Systems with Alternating-Current and

Direct-

Current Grounding Requirements.


264


(2) Common Direct-Current and Alternating-

Current

Grounding Electrode. A dc grounding

electrode conductor of the size specified by

250.166 shall be run from the marked dc

grounding electrode connection point to the

ac grounding electrode. Where an ac

grounding electrode is not accessible, the dc


connected to the ac grounding electrode

conductor in accordance with 250.64(C)(1) or

250.65(C)(2) or by using a conductor listed

for grounding and bonding. This dc

grounding electrode conductor shall not be

used as a substitute for any required ac

equipment grounding conductors.

(3) Combined Direct-Current Grounding

Electrode Conductor and

Alternating-Current Equipment

Grounding Conductor. An unspliced,

or irreversibly spliced, combined

grounding conductor shall be run

from the marked dc grounding

electrode conductor connection point

along with the ac circuit conductors

to the grounding busbar in the

associated ac equipment. This

combined grounding conductor shall

be the larger of the sizes specified by

250.122 or 250.166 and shall be


265


installed in accordance with

250.64(E). For ungrounded systems,

this conductor shall be sized in

accordance with 250.122 and shall

not be required to be larger than the

largest ungrounded phase conductor.

(E) Additional Auxillary Electrodes for

Array Grounding. New section.

690.53 Direct-Current Photovoltaic Power

Source. A

permanent label for the direct-current

photovoltaic PV power source indicating

items (1) through (5) shall be provided by the

installer at the photovoltaic PV disconnecting

means:

(1) Rated maximum power-point current

(2) Rated maximum power-point voltage

(3) Maximum system voltage Informational

Note to (3): See 690.7(A) for maximum

photovoltaic system voltage.

(4) Maximum circuit Short-circuit current.

Where the PV power source has multiple

outputs, 690.53(1) and (4) shall be specified

for each output.

(5) Maximum rated output current of the

charge controller (if installed)

690.53 Direct-Current Photovoltaic Power

Source. A

permanent label for the direct-current dc PV

power source indicating items (1) through (5) (3)

shall be provided by the installer at the dc PV

system disconnecting means and at each dc

equipment disconnecting means required by

690.15. Where a disconnecting means has more

than one dc PV power source, the values in

690.53(1) through (3) shall be specified for each

source.

(1) Rated Maximum voltage power-point current

(2) Rated Maximum circuit current power-point

voltage

(3) Maximum rated output current of the charge

controller or dc-to-dc converter (if installed)

system voltage Informational Note to (3): See

690.7(A) for maximum photovoltaic system

voltage.


266


(4) Maximum circuit current. Where the PV power

source has multiple outputs, 690.53(1) and (4)

shall be specified for each output.

(5) Maximum rated output current of the charge

controller (if installed)

690.56 Identification of Power Sources.

(A) Facilities with Stand-Alone Systems. Any

structure

or building with a photovoltaic PV power

system that is not connected to a utility

service source and is a stand-alone system

shall have a permanent plaque or directory

installed on the exterior of the building or

structure at a readily visible location

acceptable to the authority having

jurisdiction. The plaque or directory shall

indicate the location of system disconnecting

means and that the structure contains a

stand-alone electrical power system. The

marking shall be in accordance with

690.31(G).

(B)Facilities with Utility Services and PV

Systems. Buildings or structures with both

utility service and a photovoltaic PV system

shall have a permanent plaque or directory

providing the location of the service

disconnecting means and the photovoltaic

690.56 Identification of Power Sources.

(C)(1) Rapid Shutdown Type. New subsection.


267


PV system disconnecting means if not

located at the same location. The warning

sign(s) or label(s) shall comply with

110.21(B).

(C) Facilities with Rapid Shutdown. New

section.

Figure 690.56(C)(1)(a) Label for PV System that

Shut Down the Array and the Conductors Leaving

the Array. New figure.

Figure 690.56(C)(1)(b) Label for PV Systems that

Shut Down the Conductors Leaving the Array

Only. New figure.

690.59 Connection to Other Sources. New

section.

690.71 Installation.

(B) Dwellings.

(1) Operating Voltage. Storage batteries for

dwellings shall have the cells connected so as

to operate at a voltage of 50 volts, nominal,

or less less than 50 volts nominal. Lead-acid

storage batteries for dwellings shall have no

more than twenty-four 2-volt cells

connected in series (48- volts nominal).

Exception: Where live parts are not

accessible during routine battery

690.71 Installation General. New section.


268


maintenance, a battery system voltage in

accordance with 690.7 shall be permitted.

(H) Disconnects and Overcurrent Protection.

New section.

IX. Systems over 600 1000 Volts

690.80 General. Solar photovoltaic systems

with a maximum system voltage over 600

1000 volts dc shall comply with Article 490

and other requirements applicable to

installations rated over 600 1000 volts.

690.81 Listing. New section.

X. Electric Vehicle Charging.

690.90 General. New section.

690.91 Charging Equipment. New section.

ARTICLE 694

Small Wind Electric Systems

ARTICLE 694

Wind Electric Systems

694.7 Installation.

(A) Small Wind Electric Systems. A Small

wind electric system(s) shall be permitted to

supply a building or other structure in

694.7 Installation.

(B) Equipment. Wind electric systems shall be

listed and labeled or field labeled for the

application. Wind electric systems undergoing

evaluation for the type certification and listing


269


addition to other sources of supply any

services of another electricity supply system.

(B) Equipment. Inverters used in small Wind

electric systems shall be identified and listed

and labeled for the application.

(E) Receptacles. A receptacle shall be

permitted to be supplied by a small wind

electric system branch or feeder circuit for

maintenance or data acquisition use.

Receptacles shall be protected with an

overcurrent device with a rating not to

exceed the current rating of the receptacle.

All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere

receptacles installed for maintenance of the

wind turbine shall have ground-fault circuit-

interrupter protection for personnel.

(F)Metal or Nonmetallic Poles or Towers

Supporting Wind Turbines Used as a

Raceway. New section.

shall be permitted to be operated in a controlled

location with access limited to qualified

personnel.

(F) Metal or Nonmetallic Poles or Towers

Supporting Wind Turbines Used as a Raceway.

(G) Working Clearances. New section.

Table 694.7 Working Spaces. New table.

694.23 Turbine Shutdown. New section.

694.30 Permitted Methods.

(B) Flexible Cords and Cables. Flexible cords

and cables, where used to connect the

moving parts of turbines or where used for

ready removal for maintenance and repair,

shall comply with Article 400 and shall be of


270


a type identified as hard service cord or

portable power cable, shall be suitable for

extra-hard usage, shall be listed for outdoor

use, and shall be water resistant. Cables

exposed to sunlight shall be sunlight

resistant. Flexible, fine-stranded cables shall

be terminated only with terminals, lugs,

devices, or connectors in accordance with

110.14(A).

(C) Direct-Current Turbine Output Circuits

Inside a

Building. Direct-current turbine output

circuits installed inside a building or

structure shall be enclosed in metal

raceways or installed in metal enclosures, or

run in Type MC metal-clad cable that

complies with 250.118(10), from the point of

penetration of the surface of the building or

structure to the first readily accessible


694.40 Equipment Grounding.

(A) General. Exposed non–current-carrying

metal parts of towers, turbine nacelles, other

equipment, and conductor enclosures shall

be grounded in accordance with Parts IV, V,

and VI of Article 250. connected to an

equipment grounding conductor in

accordance with 250.134 or 250.136(A),

regardless of voltage. Attached metal parts,


271


such as turbine blades and tails that are not

likely to become energized, have no source

of electrical energization, shall not be

required to be grounded or bonded

connected to equipment grounding

conductors.

(B) Guy Wires. Guy wires used to support

turbine towers

shall not be required to be connected to an

equipment grounding conductor or to

comply with the requirements of 250.110.

Grounding of metallic guy wires may be

required by lightning codes. See

694.40(C)(4).

(C) (B) Tower Grounding and Bonding.

(1) Auxiliary Electrodes Grounding

Electrodes and Grounding Electrode

Conductors. A wind turbine tower shall be

connected a grounding electrode system. to

one or more auxiliary electrodes to limit

voltages

imposed by lightning. Auxiliary electrodes

shall be permitted to be installed in

accordance with 250.54. Electrodes that are

part of the tower foundation and meet the

requirements for concrete encased

electrodes in accordance with 250.52(A)(3)


272


shall be acceptable. A grounded metal tower

support shall be considered acceptable

where meeting the requirements of

250.136(A). Where installed in close

proximity to galvanized foundation or tower

anchor components, galvanized grounding

electrodes shall be used.

(2) Equipment Grounding Bonding

Conductor. An Equipment grounding

conductor(s) or supply-side bonding

jumpers, as applicable, shall be required

between turbines, towers, and the premises

grounding system in accordance with

250.110 Parts V and VI of Article 250.

(3) Tower Grounding Connections.

Equipment grounding conductors and

grounding electrode conductors, where

used, shall be connected to the metallic

towers using listed means. by exothermic

welding, listed lugs, listed pressure

connectors, listed clamps, or other listed

means. Devices, such as connectors and lugs,

shall be suitable for the material of the

conductor and the structure to which the

devices are connected. Where practicable,

contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided

anywhere in the system to eliminate the

possibility of galvanic action and corrosion.

All mechanical elements used to terminate

these conductors shall be accessible.


273


(4) Guy Wires. Guy wires used to support

turbine towers shall not be required to be

connected to an equipment grounding or

bonding conductor or to comply with the

requirements of 250.110.

Lightning Protection Systems. Auxiliary

electrodes and grounding electrode

conductors shall be permitted to act as

lightning protection system components

where meeting applicable requirements. If

separate, the tower lightning protection

system grounding electrodes shall be bonded

to the tower auxiliary grounding electrode

system. Guy wires used as lightning

protection system grounding electrodes shall

not be required to be bonded to the tower

auxiliary grounding electrode system.

IX. Systems over 600 1000 Volts

694.80 General. Small wind electric systems

with a maximum system voltage exceeding

600 1000 volts ac or dc shall comply with

Article 490 and other requirements

applicable to installations rated over 600

1000 volts.

ARTICLE 695 Fire Pumps ARTICLE 695 Fire Pumps


274


695.1 Scope.

(B) Not Covered. This article does not cover

the following:

(2) The installation pf pressure maintenance

(jockey or makeup) pumps

(3) Transfer equipment upstream of the fire

pump transfer switch(es).

695.3 Powers Source(s) for Electric Motor-

Driven Fire Pumps.

(F) Transfer of Power. New section.

(1) Power Source Selection. New section.

(2) Overcurrent Direct Selection. New

section.

695.4 Continuity of Power.

(A) Direct Connection. The supply

conductors shall directly connect the power

source to either a listed fire pump controller

or listed combination fire pump controller

and power transfer switch, or a listed fire

pump power transfer switch.

695.4 Continuity of Power.

(B)(2) (1) Overcurrent protective device(s) shall be

rated to carry indefinitely the sum of the locked-

rotor current of the largest fire pump motor and

the pressure maintenance pump motor(s) and the

full-load current all of the other fire pump

accessory equipment when connected to this

power supply. Where the locked-rotor current

value does not correspond to a standard


275


(B) Connection Through Disconnecting

Means and Overcurrent Device.

(2) Overcurrent Device Selection.

Overcurrent devices shall comply with (a) or

(b).

(a) Individual Sources. Overcurrent

protection for individual sources shall

comply with 695.4(B)(2)(a)(1) or (2).

(1) The Overcurrent protective device(s) shall

be rated to carry indefinitely the sum of the

locked-rotor current of the largest fire pump

motor(s) and the pressure maintenance

pump motor(s) and the full-load current all

of the associated other fire pump accessory

equipment when connected to this power

supply. Where the locked-rotor current value

does not correspond to a standard

overcurrent device size, the next standard

overcurrent device size shall be used in

accordance with 240.6. The requirement to

carry the locked-rotor currents indefinitely

shall not apply to conductors or devices

other than overcurrent devices in the fire

pump motor circuit(s). [20:9.2.3.4]

(2) Overcurrent protection shall be provided

ba an assembly listed for fire pump service

and complying with the following:

overcurrent device size, the next standard

overcurrent device size shall be used in

accordance with 240.6. The requirement to carry

the locked-rotor currents indefinitely shall not

apply to conductors or devices other than

overcurrent devices in the fire pump motor

circuit(s). The requirement to carry the locked

motor currents indefinitely shall not apply to

feeder overcurrent protection devices installed in

accordance with 695.3(C). [20:9.2.3.4]

(B)(3) Disconnecting Means. Add-

Exception to 695.4(B)(3)(a): For a multibuilding

campus-style complex(s) installed under the

provisions of 695.3(C), only the requirements in

695.4(B)(3)(a)(2) shall apply for normal power

source disconnects.


276


a. The overcurrent protection device

shall not open within 2 minutes at

600 percent of the full-load current of

the fire pump motor(s).

b. The overcurrent protection device

shall not open with a re-start

transient of 24 times the full-load of

the fire pump motor(s).

c. The overcurrent protection device

shall not open within 10 minutes at

300 percent of the full-load current of

the fire pump operation.

d. The trip point fir circuit breakers

shall not be field adjustable.

[20:9.2.3.4.1]

(3) Disconnecting Means. All disconnecting

devices that are unique to the fire pump

loads shall comply with items (a) through (e).

(a) Features and Location — Normal Power

Source.

The disconnecting means for the normal

power source shall comply with all of the

following: [20:9.2.3.1]

(1) Be identified as suitable for use as service

equipment

(2) Be lockable in the closed position. The

provision for locking or adding a lock to the


277


disconnecting means shall be installed on or

at the switch or circuit breaker used as the



(3) Not be located within the same

enclosure, panelboard, switchboard, or

motor control center, with of without

common bus, equipment that supplies feeds

loads other than the fire pump.

(4) Be located sufficiently remote from other

building or other fire pump source

disconnecting means such that inadvertent

operation at the same time would be

unlikely.

(b) Features and Location — On-Site Standby

Generator. The disconnecting means for an

on-site standby generator(s) used as the

alternate power source shall be installed in

accordance with 700.10(B)(5) for emergency

circuits and shall be lockable in the closed

position. The provision for locking or adding

a lock to the disconnecting means shall be

installed on or at the switch or circuit

breaker used as the disconnecting means

and shall remain in place with or without the

lock provided.

695.6 Power Wiring.


278


(D) Pump Wiring. All wiring from the

controllers to the pump motors shall be in

rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal

conduit, electrical metallic tubing, liquidtight

flexible metal conduit, or liquidtight flexible

nonmetallic conduit Type LFNC-B, listed Type

MC cable with an impervious covering, or

Type MI cable. Electrical connections at

motor terminal boxes shall be made with a

listed means of connection. Twist-on,

insulation-piercing-type, and soldered wire

connections shall not be permitted to be

used for this purpose.

695.14 Control Wiring.

(F) Generator Control Wiring Methods. Add-

The integrity of the generator control wiring shall

be continuously monitored. Loss of integrity of

the remote start circuit(s) shall initiate visual and

audible annunciation of generator malfunction at

the generator local and remote annunciator(s)

and start the generator(s).

ARTICLE 700 Emergency Systems ARTICLE 700 Emergency Systems

700.2 Definitions.

Branch Circuit Emergency Lighting Transfer

Switch. New definition.


279


Luminaire, Directly Controlled. New definition.

Temporary Source of Power for Maintenance or

Repair of the Alternate Source of Power. New

definition.

Figure 700.3(F). New figure.

700.5 Transfer Equipment.

(E) Documentation. New subsection.

(D) Ground Fault. Add-

For systems with multiple emergency sources

connected to a paralleling bus, the ground fault

sensor shall be permitted to be at an alternate

location.

700.8 Surge Protection. New section.

700.10 Wiring, Emergency System.

B) Wiring. Wiring of two or more emergency

circuits supplied from the same source shall

be permitted in the same raceway, cable,

box, or cabinet. Wiring from an emergency

source or emergency source distribution

overcurrent protection to emergency loads

shall be kept entirely independent of all

other wiring and equipment, unless

otherwise permitted in 700.10(B) (1) through

(5):

700.10 Wiring, Emergency System.

(A) Identification. Emergency circuits shall be

permanently marked so they will be readily

identified as a component of an emergency circuit

or system by the following methods:

(1) All boxes and enclosures (including transfer

switches, generators, and power panels) for

emergency circuits shall be permanently marked

as a component of an emergency circuit or

system. they will be readily identified as a

component of an emergency circuit or system.

(2) Where boxes and enclosures are not

encountered, exposed cable or raceway systems


280


(5) Wiring from an emergency source to

supply emergency and other loads any

combination of emergency, legally required,

or optional loads in accordance with (a), (b),

(c), and (d):

a. From Separate vertical switchgear sections

or switchboard sections, with or without a

common bus, or from individual disconnects

mounted in separate enclosures shall be

used to separate emergency loads from all

other loads.

b. The common bus of separate sections of

the switchgear, or separate sections of the

switchboard or the individual enclosures

shall be permitted to be supplied by single or

multiple feeders without overcurrent

protection at the source.

Exception to (5)(b): Overcurrent protection

shall be permitted at the source or for the

equipment, provided the overcurrent

protection complies with the requirements of

700.27 700.28.

c. Emergency circuits Legally required and

optional standby circuits shall not originate

from the same vertical switchgear section,

vertical switchboard section, panelboard

enclosure, or individual disconnect enclosure

as emergency other circuits.

shall be permanently marked to be identified as a

component of an emergency circuit or system, at

intervals not to exceed 7.6 m (25 ft).

(B) Wiring. Wiring of two or more emergency

circuits supplied from the same source shall be

permitted in the same raceway, cable, box, or

cabinet. Wiring from an emergency source or

emergency source distribution overcurrent

protection to emergency loads shall be kept

entirely independent of all other wiring and

equipment, unless otherwise permitted in

700.10(B)(1) through (5):

(1) Wiring from the normal power source located

in transfer equipment enclosures

(2) Wiring supplied from two sources in exit or

emergency luminaires

(3) Wiring from two sources in a listed load

control relay

supplying exit or emergency luminaires, or in a

common junction box, attached to exit or

emergency

luminaires

(4) Wiring within a common junction box attached

to unit

equipment, containing only the branch circuit

supplying

the unit equipment and the emergency circuit

supplied

by the unit equipment

(5) Wiring from an emergency source to supply

emergency and other (nonemergency) loads in

accordance with (a), (b), (c), and (d):


281


d. It shall be permissible to utilize single or

multiple

feeders to supply distribution equipment

between an emergency source and the point

where the emergency combination of

emergency, legally required, or optional

loads are separated from all other loads.

(D) Fire Protection. Emergency systems shall

meet the additional requirements in (D)(1)

through (D)(3) in assembly occupancies for

not less than 1000 persons or in buildings

above 23 m (75 ft) in height with any of the

following occupancy classes: assembly,

educational, residential, detention and

correctional, business, and mercantile.

a. Separate vertical switchgear sections or

switchboard sections, with or without a common

bus, or individual disconnects mounted in

separate enclosures shall be used to separate

emergency loads from all other loads.

b. The common bus of separate sections of the

switchgear, separate sections of the switchboard

or the individual enclosures shall be either of the

following:

(i) permitted to be Supplied by single or multiple

feeders without overcurrent protection at the

source.

(ii) Supplied by single or multiple feeders with

overcurrent protection, provided that the

overcurrent protection that is common to an

emergency system and any non-emergency

system(s) is selectively coordinated with the next

downstream overcurrent protection device in the

nonemergency system(s)

c. Emergency circuits shall not originate from the

same vertical switchgear section, vertical

switchboard section, panelboard enclosure, or

individual disconnect enclosure as other circuits.

d. It shall be permissible to utilize single or

multiple feeders to supply distribution equipment

between an emergency source and the point


282


where the emergency loads are separated from

all other loads.

(D) Fire Protection. Emergency systems shall

meet the

additional requirements in (D)(1) through (D)(3) in

the following occupancies:

(1) Assembly occupancies for not less than

1000 persons

(2) or in Buildings above 23 m (75 ft) in

height with any of the following

occupancy classes: assembly,

educational, residential, detention and

correctional, business, and mercantile.

(3) Health care occupancies where persons

are not capable of self preservation.

(4) Educational occupancies with more than

300 occupants.

(1) Feeder-Circuit Wiring. Feeder-circuit wiring

shall meet one of the following conditions:

(1) The cable or raceway is Be installed in spaces

or areas that are fully protected by an approved

automatic fire suppression system

(2) The cable or raceway is protected by Be a

listed electrical circuit protective system with a

minimum

2-hour fire rating

(3) The cable or raceway is listed fire-resistive

cable system Be protected by a listed thermal

barrier system for electrical system components

with a minimum 2-hour fire rating


283


(4) The cable or raceway is protected by a listed

fire-rated assembly that has a minimum fire rating

of 2 hours and contains only emergency circuits.

Be protected by a listed fire-rated assembly that

has a minimum fire rating of 2 hours and contains

only emergency wiring circuits.

(5) Be encased in a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of

concrete

(3) Generator Control Wiring. Control conductors

installed between the transfer equipment and the

emergency generator shall be kept entirely

independent of all other wiring and shall meet the

conditions of 700.10(D)(1). The integrity of the

generator control wiring shall be continuously

monitored. Loss of integrity of the remote start

circuits shall initiate visual and audible

annunciation of generator malfunction at the

generator local and remote annunciator(s) and

start the generator(s).


(B) Generator Set.

(6) Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an

outdoor housed generator set is equipped

with a readily accessible disconnecting

means in accordance with 445.18, and the

disconnecting means is located within sight

of the building or structure supplied, an

additional disconnecting means shall not be

required where ungrounded conductors

serve or pass through the building or

700.12 General Requirements. Current supply

shall be such that, in the event of failure of the

normal supply to, or within, the building or group

of buildings concerned, emergency lighting,

emergency power, or both shall be available

within the time required for the application but

not to exceed 10 seconds. The supply system for

emergency purposes, in addition to the normal

services to the building and meeting the general

requirements of this section, shall be one or more

of the types of systems described in 700.12(A)

through (E). Unit equipment in accordance with

700.12(F) shall satisfy the applicable


284


structure. Where the generator supply

conductors terminate at a disconnecting

means in or on a building or structure, the

disconnecting means shall meet the


Exception: For installations under single

management, where conditions of

maintenance and supervision ensure that

only qualified persons will monitor and

service the installation and where

documented safe switching procedures are

established and maintained for

disconnection, the generator set

disconnecting means shall not be required to

be located within sight of the building or

structure served.

(D) Separate Service. Where approved by

the authority having jurisdiction as suitable

for use as an emergency source of power, an

additional service shall be permitted. This

service shall be in accordance with the

applicable provisions of Article 230 and the

following additional requirements:

(1) Separate overhead service conductors,

service drops, underground service

conductors, or service laterals shall be

installed.

(2) The service conductors for the separate

service shall be installed sufficiently remote

requirements of this article.

In selecting an emergency source of power,

consideration

shall be given to the occupancy and the type of

service to be rendered, whether of minimum

duration, as for evacuation of a theater, or longer

duration, as for supplying emergency power and

lighting due to an indefinite period of current

failure from trouble either inside or outside the

building.

Equipment shall be designed and located so as to

minimize the hazards that might cause complete

failure due to flooding, fires, icing, and vandalism.

Equipment for sources of power as described in

700.12(A) through (E) shall be installed either in

spaces fully protected by approved automatic fire

suppression systems (sprinklers, carbon dioxide

systems and so forth) or in spaces with a 1-hour

fire rating where located within the following:

(1) Assembly occupancies for greater more

than 1000 persons or in

(2) Buildings above 23 m (75 ft) in height with

any of the following occupancy classes —

assembly, educational, residential,

detention and correctional, business, and

mercantile.

(3) Health care occupancies where persons

are not capable of self preservation

(4) Educational occupancies with more than

300 occupants

—shall be installed either in spaces fully protected

by approved automatic fire suppression systems


285


electrically and physically from any other

service conductors to minimize the

possibility of simultaneous interruption of

supply.

(F) Unit Equipment.

(1) Components of Unit Equipment.

Individual unit equipment for emergency

illumination shall consist of the following:

(1) A rechargeable battery

(2) A battery charging means

(3) Provisions for one or more lamps

mounted on the equipment, or shall be

permitted to have terminals for remote

lamps, or both

(4) A relaying device arranged to energize

the lamps automatically upon failure of the

supply to the unit equipment

(2) Installation of Unit Equipment. Unit

equipment shall be installed in accordance

with 700.12(F)(2)(1) through (6).

(1) The batteries shall be of suitable rating

and capacity to supply and maintain at not

less than 871⁄2 percent of the nominal

battery voltage for the total lamp load

associated with the unit for a period of at

least 11⁄2 hours, or the unit equipment shall

(sprinklers, carbon dioxide systems, and so forth)

or in spaces with a 1-hour fire rating.


286


supply and maintain not less than 60 percent

of the initial emergency illumination for a

period of at least 11⁄2 hours. Storage

batteries, whether of the acid or alkali type,

shall be designed and constructed to meet

the requirements of emergency service.

(2) Unit equipment shall be permanently

fixed in place (i.e., not portable) and shall

have all wiring to each unit installed in

accordance with the requirements of any of

the wiring methods in Chapter 3. Flexible

cord-and-plug connection shall be permitted,

provided that the cord does not exceed 900

mm (3 ft) in length.

(3)The branch circuit feeding the unit

equipment shall be the same branch circuit

as that serving the normal lighting in the

area and connected ahead of any local

switches. The branch circuit that feeds unit

equipment shall be clearly identified at the

distribution panel. Emergency luminaires

that obtain power from a unit equipment

and are not part of the unit equipment shall

be wired to the unit equipment as required

by 700.10 and by one of the wiring methods

of Chapter 3.

Exception No. 1: In a separate and

uninterrupted area


287


supplied by a minimum of three normal

lighting circuits that are not part of the

multiwire branch circuit, a separate branch

circuit for unit equipment shall be permitted

if it originates from the same panelboard as

that of the normal lighting circuits and is

provided with a lock-on feature.

(4) The branch circuit that feed unit

equipment shall be clearly identified

at the distribution panel.

(5) Emergency luminaires that obtain

power from a unit equipment and are

not part of the unit equipment shall

be wired to the unit equipment as

required by 700.10 and by one of the

wiring methods of Chapter 3.

(6) Exception No. 2: Remote heads

providing lighting for the exterior of

an exit door shall be permitted to be

supplied by the unit equipment

serving the area immediately inside

the exit door.

700.16 Emergency Illumination. Emergency

illumination shall include all required means

of egress lighting, illuminated exit signs, and

all other lights specified as necessary to

provide required illumination.

Emergency lighting systems shall be

designed and installed so that the failure of


288


any individual lighting element, such as the

burning out of a lamp, cannot leave in total

darkness any space that requires emergency

illumination.

Where high-intensity discharge lighting such

as high and low-pressure sodium, mercury

vapor, and metal halide is used as the sole

source of normal illumination, the

emergency lighting system shall be required

to operate until normal illumination has

been restored.

Where an emergency system is installed,

emergency illumination shall be provided in

the area of the disconnecting means

required by 225.21 and 225.70, as

applicable, where the disconnecting means

are installed indoors.

Exception: Alternative means that ensure

that the emergency lighting illumination level

is maintained shall be permitted.

700.19 Multiwire Branch Circuits. New

section.

700.23 Dimmer and Relay Systems. A

dimmer or relay system containing more

than one dimmer or relay and listed for use

in emergency systems shall be permitted to

be used as a control device for energizing

emergency lighting circuits. Upon failure of


289


normal power, the dimmer or relay system

shall be permitted to selectively energize

only those branch circuits required to

provide minimum emergency illumination.

All branch circuits supplied by the dimmer or

relay system cabinet shall comply with the

wiring methods of Article 700.

700.24 Directly Controlled Luminaires. New

section inserted.

700.26 700.27 Ground-Fault Protection of

Equipment. The alternate source for

emergency systems shall not be required to

have ground-fault protection of equipment

with automatic disconnecting means.

Ground-fault indication of the emergency

source shall be provided in accordance with

700.6(D) if ground-fault protection of

equipment with automatic disconnecting

means is not provided.

700.27 700.28 Selective Coordination.

Emergency system(s) overcurrent devices

shall be selectively coordinated with all

supply side overcurrent protective devices.



qualified persons engaged primarily in the



documented and made available tom those


290


authorized to design install, inspect,


Exception: Selective coordination shall not be

required between two overcurrent devices

located in series if no loads are connected in

parallel with the downstream device.


(C) Automatic Transfer Switches. Automatic

transfer switches shall be electrically

operated and mechanically held. Automatic

transfer switches, rated 600 1000 VAC and

below, shall be listed for emergency use.


(D) Documentation. New section.

701.6 (D) Ground Fault. Add-

For systems with multiple emergency sources

connected to a paralleling bus, the ground fault

sensor shall be permitted at an alternate location.


(B) Generator Set.

(5) Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an

outdoor housed generator set is equipped

with a readily accessible disconnecting

means in accordance with 445.18, and the

disconnecting means is located within sight

of the building or structure supplied, an

additional disconnecting means shall not be

required where ungrounded conductors


291


serve or pass through the building or

structure. Where the generator supply

conductors terminate at a disconnecting

means in or on a building or structure, the

disconnecting means shall meet the


(701) Separate Service. Where approved, a

separate service shall be permitted as a

legally required source of standby power.

This service shall be in accordance with the

applicable provisions of Article 230, with

separate service drop or lateral or a separate

set of overhead or underground service

conductors sufficiently remote electrically

and physically from any other service to

minimize the possibility of simultaneous

interruption of supply from an occurrence in

another service.

701.26 Ground-Fault Protection of

Equipment. The alternate source for legally

required standby systems shall not be

required to have ground-fault protection of

equipment with automatic disconnecting

means. Ground-fault indication of the legally

required standby source shall be provided in

accordance with 701.6(D) if ground-fault

protection of equipment with automatic

disconnecting means is not provided.

701.27 Coordination. Legally required

standby system(s) overcurrent devices shall


292


be selectively coordinated with all supply-

side overcurrent protective devices.



qualified persons engaged primarily in the



documented and made available to those

authorized to design, install, inspect,


Exception: Selective coordination shall not be

required between two overcurrent devices

located in series if no loads are connected in

parallel with the downstream device.

ARTICLE 702 Optional Standby Systems ARTICLE 702 Optional Standby Systems

702.5 Transfer Equipment. Add-

The short-circuit current rating of the transfer

equipment, based on the specific overcurrent

protective device type and settings protecting the

transfer equipment, shall be field marked on the

exterior of the transfer equipment.

702.7 Signs.

(C) Power Inlet. New subsection added.

702.12 Outdoor Generator Sets. 702.12 Outdoor Generator Sets.


293


(A) Permanently Installed Generators and

Portable Generators Greater Than 15 kW.

Where an outdoor housed generator set is

equipped with a readily accessible

disconnecting means in accordance with

445.18, and the disconnecting means is

located within sight of the building or

structure supplied, an additional

disconnecting means shall not be required

where ungrounded conductors serve or pass

through

the building or structure. Where the

generator supply conductors terminate at a

disconnecting means in or on a building or

structure, the disconnecting means shall

meet the requirements of 225.36.

(B)Portable Generators 15 kW or Less. New

subsection.

(C) Power Inlets Rated at 100 Amperes or

Greater, for Portable Generators. New

subsection.

ARTICLE 705 Interconnected Electric Power

Production Sources

705.2 Definitions.

Multimode Inverter. New definition.

Table 705.3 Other Articles. Revised.

705.12 Point of Connection.


294


(D) Utility-Interactive Inverters.

(1) Dedicated Overcurrent and Disconnect.

Each The source Interconnection of one or

more inverters installed in one system shall

be made at a dedicated circuit breaker or

fusible disconnecting means.

(2) Bus or Conductor Ampere Rating.

Revised.

(6) (5) Fastening. Renumbered.

(6) Wire Harness and Exposed Cable Arc-

Fault Protection. New section.

(7) Inverter Output Connection. Unless the

panelboard is rated not less than the sum of

the ampere ratings of all overcurrent devices

supplying it, a connection in a panelboard

shall be positioned at the opposite (load) end

from the input feeder location or main circuit

location. The bus or conductor rating shall be

sized for the loads connected in accordance

with Article 220. In systems with

panelboards connected in series, the rating

of the first overcurrent device directly

connected to the output of a utility-

interactive inverter(s) shall be used in the

calculations for all busbars and conductors. A

permanent warning label shall be applied to


295


the distribution equipment with the

following or equivalent wording:

WARNING

INVERTER OUTPUT CONNECTION

DO NOT RELOCATE THIS

OVERCURRENT DEVICE

705.23 Interactive System Disconnecting Means.

New section.

705.31 Location of Overcurrent Protection.

New section.


(C) Conductor Ampacity. New subsection.

705.100 Unbalanced Interconnections.

(A) Single Phase. Single-phase inverters for

hybrid systems and ac modules in interactive

hybrid systems shall be connected to three-

phase power systems in order to limit

unbalanced voltages to not more than 3

percent. not be connected to 3-phase power

systems unless the interconnected system is

designed so that significant unbalanced

voltages cannot result.


296


Part IV. Microgrid Systems. New part and

sections.

ARTICLE 706 Energy Storage Systems. New

article, sections, and subsection.

ARTICLE 708 Critical Operations Power

Systems (COPS)

ARTICLE 708 Critical Operations Power Systems

(COPS)

708.10 Feeder and Branch Circuit Wiring.

(A) Identification.

(1) Boxes and Enclosures. In a building or at

a structure where s critical operations power

system and any other type of power system

are present, all boxes and enclosures

(including transfer switches, generators, and

power panels) for critical operations power

system circuits shall be permanently marked

so they will be readily identified as a

component of the critical operations power

system.

708.10 Feeder and Branch Circuit Wiring.

(A)(2) Receptacle Identification. Add-

Nonlocking-type, 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere

receptacles supplied from the COPS shall have an

illuminated face or an indicator light to indicate

that there is power to the receptacle.

(2) Fire Protection for Feeders. Feeders shall

meet one of

the following conditions:

(1) The cable or raceway is protected by Be a

listed electrical circuit protective system with a

minimum 2-hour fire rating

(2)The cable or raceway is Be protected by a

listed fire-rated cable system with assembly that

has a

minimum fire rating of 2 hours


297


(3) The cable or raceway is protected by a listed

fire-rated assembly that has a minimum fire rating

of 2 hours.

(4) The cable or raceway is Be encased in a

minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete

708.14 Wiring of HVAC, Fire Alarm, Security,

Emergency

Communications, and Signaling Systems. All

conductors

or cables shall be installed using any of the

metal wiring methods permitted by

708.10©(1) and in addition shall comply with

708.14(1) through (8), as applicable.

(1) All cables for fire alarm, security, signal

signaling systems, and emergency

communications shall be shielded twisted

pair cables or installed to comply with the

performance requirements of the system.

(2) Shields of cables for fire alarm, security,

signal signaling systems, and emergency

communications shall be arranged in


published installation instructions

continuous.

(7) All cables for fire alarm, security, and

signaling systems shall be riser-rated and

shall be a listed 2-hour electrical circuit


298


protective system. Riser emergency

communication cables shall be Type CMR-CI

or shall be riser-rated and shall be a listed 2-

hour electrical circuit protective system.

708.20 Sources of Power.

(F) Generator Set.

(5) Outdoor Generator Sets.

(a) Permanently Installed Generators and

Portable Generators Greater Than 15 kW.

Where an outdoor housed generator set is

equipped with a readily accessible

disconnecting means in accordance with

445.18, and the disconnecting means is

located within sight of the building or

structure supplied, an additional



through the building or structure. Where the

generator supply conductors terminate at a

disconnect means in or on a building or

structure, the disconnecting means shall

meet the requirements of 225.26.

(b) Portable Generators 15 kW or less.

Where a portable generator, rated 15 kW or

less, is installed using a flanged inlet or other

cord- and plug-type connection, a



299



through a building or structure.


(E) Documentation. New section.

ARTICLE 710 Stand-Alone Systems

710.6 Equipment Approval. New section.

ARTICLE 725 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3

Remote-Control, Signaling, and Power-

Limited Circuits

725.1 Definitions.

Power-Limited Tray Cable (PLTC). New

definition.


(K) Installation of Conductors with Other

Systems. New subsection.

(L) Corrosive, Damp, or Wet Locations. New

section.


(C) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling

Spaces. Add-


selected in accordance with Table 725.154 and

installed in accordance with 725.135(B) and

300.22(B), Exception shall be permitted to be


300


installed in ducts specifically fabricated for

environmental air.



installed in accordance with 725.135(C) shall be

permitted to be installed in other spaces used for

environmental air (plenums).

(M) Cable Routing Assemblies. New section.

(N) Communications Raceways. New section.

725.121 Power Sources for Class 2 and Class 3

Circuits.

(C) Marking. New subsection.

725.135 Installation of Class 2, Class 3, and

PLTC Cables. New section.

725.139 Installation of Conductors of

Different Circuits in the Same Cable,

Enclosure, Cable Tray, Raceway, or Cable

Routing Assembly. Add “raceway and cable

routing assembly”.

725.154 Applications of Listed Class 2, Class

3, and

PLTC Cables. Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC cables

shall comply with any of the requirements

described in 725.154(A) through (I) (C) and

indicated in Table 725.154.


301


Table 725.154 Applications of Listed Class 2,

Class 3, and PLTC Cables in Buildings. New

table.

725.170 Listing and Marking of Equipment for

Power and Data Transmission. New Section.

725.179 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class

3, and

Type PLTC Cables; Communications

Raceways; and Cable Routing Assemblies.

Class 2, Class 3, and Type PLTC Cables, and

nonmetallic signaling raceways and cable

routing assemblies installed as wiring

methods within buildings shall be listed as

being resistant to the spread of fire and

other criteria in accordance with 725.179(A)

through (K) and shall be marked in

accordance with 725.179(L) 725.179(K).

F) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical

Circuit

Protective System. Cables that are used for

survivability of critical Circuits under fire

conditions shall meet either 725.179(F)(1) or

(F)(2) as follows:

(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. Circuit

Integrity (CI) cables be listed as circuit

integrity (CI) cable. Cables specified in

725.154(A), (B), (D)(1), and (E), and

725.179 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class 3,

and Type PLTC Cables.

(I) Limited Power (LP) Cables. New section.


302


used for survivability of critical

circuits, circuit integrity, shall have

the additional classification using the

suffix “-CI”. Circuit Integrity (CI)

cables shall only be permitted to be

installed in a raceway where

specifically listed and marked as

Cables that are part of a an listed

electrical circuit protective system as

covered in 725.179(F)(2) shall be

considered to meet the requirements

of survivability.

(2) Electrical Circuit Protective System.

New subsection.

(J) (I) Riser Cable Routing Assemblies

Signaling Raceways. Riser cable routing

assemblies signaling raceways shall be listed

as having adequate fire-resistant

characteristics capable of preventing the

carrying of fire from floor to floor.

(K) (J) General-Purpose General-Use Cable

Routing Assemblies Signaling Raceways.

General-use cable routing assemblies

purpose signaling raceways shall be listed as

being resistant to the spread of fire.

ARTICLE 727 Instrumentation Tray Cable: Type

ITC


303


727.4 Uses Permitted. Add-

Exception to (5): Where not subject to physical

damage, Type ITC-FR shall be permitted to

transition between cable trays and between cable

trays and utilization equipment or devices for a

distance not to exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) without

continuous support. The cable shall be

mechanically supported where exiting the cable

tray to ensure that the minimum bending radius is

not exceeded.

ARTICLE 728 Fire-Resistive Cable Systems.

New article.

ARTICLE 728 Fire-Resistive Cable Systems

728.5 Installations.

(C) Raceways and Couplings. Add-

The raceway fill for each system shall comply with

the listing requirements for the system and shall

not be greater than the fill permitted in Table 1,

Chapter 9.

ARTICLE 750 Energy Management Systems.

New article.


304


ARTCILE 760 Fire Alarm Systems ARTCILE 760 Fire Alarm Systems


B) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling

Spaces.

Power limited and non-power-limited fire alarm

cables Section 300.22, where installed in ducts or

plenums or other spaces used for environmental

air shall comply with 300.22.

Exception No. 1: Power-limited fire alarm cables


installed in accordance with 760.135(B) and

300.22(B), Exception shall be permitted to be

installed in ducts specifically fabricated for

environmental air.

Exception No. 2: Power-limited fire alarm cables


installed in accordance with 760.135(C) shall be

permitted to be installed in other spaces used for

environmental air (plenums).

As permitted in 760.53(B)(1) and (B)(2) and Table

760.154.

(L) Cable Routing Assemblies. New section.

(M) Communications Raceways. New section.

760.24 Mechanical Execution of Work.

(A) General. Fire alarm circuits shall be

installed in a neat workmanlike manner.

Cables and conductors installed exposed on

the surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be

supported by the building structure in such a

manner that the cable will not be damaged


305


by normal building use. Such cables shall be

supported by straps, staples, cable ties,

hangers, or similar fittings designed and

installed so as not to damage the cable. The

installation shall also comply with 300.4(D).

(B) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. New

subsection.

760.32 Fire Alarm Circuits Extending Beyond

One Building. Non-power limited fire alarm

circuits and power-limited fire alarm circuits

that extend beyond one building and run

outdoors either shall meet the installation

requirements of Parts II, III, and IV of Article

800 or shall meet the installation

requirements of Part I of Article 300. Non–

power-limited fire alarm circuits that extend

beyond one building and run outdoors shall

meet the installation requirements of Part I

of Article 300 and the applicable sections of

Part I of Article 225.

760.135 Installation of PLFA Cables in

Buildings. New section.

760.139 Installation of Conductors of

Different PLFA Circuits, Class, Class 3, AND

Communications Circuits in the Same Cable,

Enclosure, Cable Tray, Raceway, or Cable

Routing Assembly. Add “raceway and cable

routing assembly”


306


760.154 Applications of Listed PLFA Cables.

PLFA cables shall comply with the

requirements described in Table 760.154

either 760.154(A), (B), or (C) or where cable

substitutions are made as shown in

760.154(D) (A). Where substitute cables are

installed, the wiring requirements of Article

760, Parts I and III, shall apply. Types FPLP-CI,

FPLR-CI, and FPL-CI cables shall be permitted

to be installed to provide 2-hour circuit

integrity rated cables.

Table 760.154(A) Cable Substitutions. New

table.

(F) Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or

Electrical

Circuit Protective System. Cables that are

used for survivability of critical circuits under

fire conditions shall meet either

760.176(F)(1) or (F)(2) as follows:

(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. New

section.

(2) Electrical Circuit Protection System.

New section.

be listed as circuit integrity (CI) cable. Cables

specified in 760.176(C), (D), and (E), and

used for circuit integrity shall have the

additional classification using the suffix “-CI.”


307


Cables that are part of a listed electrical

circuit protective system shall be considered

to meet the requirements of survivability.

760.176 Listing and Marking of NPLFA Cables.

Add-

Non-power-limited fire alarm cables shall have a

temperature rating of not less than 600C (1400F).

(G)NPLFA Cable Marking. Add-

Temperature rating shall be marked on the jacket

of NPLFA cables that have a temperature rating

exceeding 600C (1400F). The jacket of NPLFA

cables shall be marked with the conductor size.

760.179 Listing and marking of PLFA Cables

and Insulated Continuous Line-Type Fire

Detectors.

G) Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or

Electrical

Circuit Protective System. Cables used for

survivability of critical circuits under fire

conditions shall meet either 760.179(G)(1) or

(G)(2) as follows:

(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. New

section.

(2) Electrical Circuit Protective System.

New section.

760.179 Listing and marking of PLFA Cables and

Insulated Continuous Line-Type Fire Detectors.

(C) Ratings. Add-

The cable shall have a temperature rating of not

less than 600C (1400F).

(I)Cable Marking. Add-

Temperature ratings shall be marked on the

jacket of PLFA cables that have a temperature

rating exceeding 600C (1400F). The jacket of PLFA

cables shall be marked with the conductor size.


308


be listed as circuit integrity (CI) cable. Cables

specified in 760.179(D), (E), (F), and (H) and

used for circuit integrity shall have the

additional classification using the suffix “-CI.”

Cables that are part of a listed electrical

circuit protective system shall be considered

to meet the requirements of survivability.

ARTICLE 770 Optical Fiber Cables and

Runways

ARTICLE 770 Optical Fiber Cables and Runways

770.2 Definitions.

Electrical Circuit Protective System. New

definition.



(B) Cables in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or

Vapor Removal. New subsection inserted.

770.12 Innerduct for Optical Fiber Cables.

Listed plenum

optical fiber communications raceway, listed

riser optical fiber raceway, or and listed

general-purpose optical fiber

communications raceway selected in

accordance with the provisions of 770.154


309


Table 800.154(b) shall be permitted to be

installed as innerduct in any type of listed

raceway permitted in Chapter 3.


Optical fiber cables shall be installed in a

neat and workmanlike manner. Cables

installed exposed on the surface of ceilings

and sidewalls shall be supported by the

building structure in such a manner that the

cable will not be damaged by normal

building use. Such cables shall be secured by

hardware including straps, staples, cable ties,



installation shall also conform with 300.4(D)

through (G) and 300.11. Nonmetallic cable

ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories

used to secure and support cables in other

spaces used for environmental air (plenums)

shall be listed as having low smoke and heat

release properties.

770.26 Spread of Fire or Products of

Combustion. Installations of optical fiber

cables and communications raceways in

hollow spaces, vertical shafts, and ventilation

or air-handling ducts shall be made so that

the possible spread of fire or products of

combustion will not be substantially

increased. Openings around penetrations of

optical fiber cables and communications

raceways


310


through fire-resistant–rated walls, partitions,

floors, or ceilings shall be firestopped using

approved methods to maintain the fire

resistance rating.

770.44 Overhead (Aerial) Optical Fiber Cables.

New section and subsections.

770.47 Underground Optical Fiber Cables

Entering Buildings. New section.

770.48 Unlisted Cables and Raceways

Entering Buildings.

(B) Nonconductive Cables in Raceway.

Unlisted nonconductive outside plant optical

fiber cables shall be permitted to enter the

building from the outside and shall be

permitted to be installed in any of the

following:

(1) Intermediate metal conduit (IMC)

(2) Rigid metal conduit (RMC)

(3) Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC)

(4) Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)

run in raceway systems installed in

compliance with any of the following articles

in Chapter 3: Article 342, Intermediate Metal

Conduit: Type IMC; Article 344, Rigid Metal

Conduit: Type RMC; Article 352, Rigid

Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type PVC; and

770.48 Unlisted Cables and Raceways Entering

Buildings.

(A) Conductive and Nonconductive Cables. Add-

The point of entrance shall be permitted to be

extended from the penetration of the external

wall or floor slab by continuously enclosing the

entrance optical fiber cables in rigid metal conduit

(RMC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) to the

point of emergence.

(B)Nonconductive Cables in Raceway. Add-

Unlisted nonconductive outside plant cables

installed in rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC)

or electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall not be

permitted to be installed in risers, ducts used for

environmental air, plenums used for

environmental air, and other spaces used for

environmental air.


311


Article 358, Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type

EMT.

770.100 Entrance Cable Bonding and

Grounding.

(4) Length. New section inserted.

(5) (6) Physical Damage Protection. Bonding

conductors Where necessary, the bonding

conductor and grounding electrode

conductor shall be protected where exposed

to guarded from physical damage. Where

the bonding conductor or grounding

electrode conductor these conductors are

installed in a metal raceway, both ends of

the raceway shall be bonded to the

contained conductors or to the same

terminal or electrode to which the bonding

conductor or grounding electrode conductor

is connected conductor(s) is (are) connected.

770.110 Raceways and Cable Routing

Assemblies for Optical Fiber Cables.

(A) Types of Raceways. Optical fiber cables

shall be permitted to be installed in any

raceway that complies with either (A)(1) or

(A)(2) and in cable routing assemblies

installed in compliance with 770.110(C).

(2) Other Permitted Communications

Raceways. Optical fiber cables shall be


312


permitted to be installed in listed plenum

communication raceways, listed riser

communications raceways, and listed

general-purpose communications raceways

optical fiber raceway, listed plenum

communications raceway, listed riser optical

fiber raceway, listed riser communications

raceway, listed general-purpose optical fiber

raceway, or listed general-purpose

communications raceway selected in

accordance with the provisions of 770.113,

800.110, and 800.113, and installed in

accordance with 362.24 through 362.56,

where the requirements applicable to

electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) apply.

(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. New

section.

770.113 Installation of Optical Fiber Cables

and Raceways, and Cables Routing

Assemblies. Installation of optical fiber

cables and raceways, and cable routing

assemblies shall comply with 770.113(A)

through (J). Installation of raceways shall also

comply with 770.12 and 770.110.

(A) Listing. Optical fiber cables and raceways,

and cable routing assemblies installed in

buildings shall be listed.

Exception: Optical fiber cables that comply

with 770.48 shall not be required to be listed.


313


(C) Other Spaces Used For Environmental

Air (Plenums).

The following cables and raceways shall be

permitted in other spaces used for

environmental air as described in 300.22(C):

(1) Types OFNP and OFCP cables

(2) Plenum optical fiber raceway

(3) (2) Types OFNP and OFCP cables installed

in plenum optical fiber raceway or plenum

communications raceway

(4) (3) Types OFNP and OFCP cables

supported and plenum optical fiber raceways

supported by open metallic cable trays or

cable tray systems

(5) (4) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR,

OFNG, OFCG,

OFN, and OFC cables installed in raceways

that are installed in compliance with

300.22(C)

(6)(5) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR,

OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC cables and

plenum optical fiber raceways, riser optical

fiber raceways and general-purpose optical

fiber raceways supported by solid bottom

metal cable trays with solid metal covers in


314


other spaces used for environmental air

(plenums) as described in 300.22(C)

(D) Risers — Cables, Raceways and Cable

Routing Assemblies in Vertical Runs. The

following cables, raceways and cable routing

assemblies shall be permitted in vertical runs

penetrating one or more floors and in

vertical runs in a shaft:

(1) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, and OFCR

cables

(2) Plenum and riser optical fiber raceways

(3) Riser cable routing assemblies

(4) (2) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, and OFCR

cables installed in:

a. Plenum optical fiber raceway

b. Plenum communications raceway

c. Riser optical fiber raceway

d. Riser communications raceway

e. Riser cable routing assembly

(E) Risers — Cables and Raceways in Metal

Raceways.


315


The following cables and raceways shall be

permitted in metal raceways in a riser having

firestops at each floor:

(1) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR, OFNG,

OFCG, OFN, and OFC cables

(2) Plenum, riser, and general-purpose

optical fiber raceways


OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC cables installed

in:


b. a. Plenum communications raceways


d. b. Riser communications raceways

e. General-purpose optical fiber raceway

f. c. General-purpose communications

raceway

(F) Risers — Cables, Raceways, and Cable

Routing Assemblies in Fireproof Shafts. The

following cables, raceways, and cable routing

assemblies shall be permitted to be installed

in fireproof riser shafts having firestops at

each floor:


316






(3) Riser and general-purpose cable routing

assemblies



in:



b. Plenum cable routing assemblies


d. c. Riser communications raceways

d. Riser cable routing assemblies


f. e. General-purpose communications

raceways

g. Riser cable routing assembly

h. f. General-purpose cable routing

assemblies assembly


317


(G) Risers — One- and Two-Family

Dwellings. The following cables, raceways,

and cable routing assemblies shall be

permitted in one- and two-family dwellings:






assemblies



in:









raceways


318




assemblies assembly

(H) Cable Trays. The following cables and

raceways shall be permitted to be supported

by cable trays:






OFNG, OFCG,

OFN, and OFC cables installed in:




d. b. Riser communications raceways


f. c. General-purpose communications

raceways


319


(I) Distributing Frames and Cross-Connect

Arrays. The following cables, raceways, and

cable routing assemblies shall be permitted

to be installed in distributing frames and

cross-connect arrays:





(3) Riser or general-purpose cable routing

assemblies



in:









320



raceways



assemblies assembly

(J) Other Building Locations. The following

cables, raceways, and cable routing


in building locations other than the locations

covered in 770.113(B) through (I):






assemblies



in:






321




f. General-purpose communications raceway

g. d. Riser cable routing assemblies assembly

e. General-purpose communications

raceways


assemblies assembly


OFCG, OFN, and OFC cables installed in a

raceway of a type recognized in Chapter 3

770.133 Installation of Optical fibers and

Electrical Conductors.

(A) With Conductors for Electric Light,

Power, Class 1,

Non–Power-Limited Fire Alarm, or Medium

Power

Network-Powered Broadband

Communications Circuits.

When optical fibers are within the same

composite cable for electric light, power,

Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, or

medium-power network-powered

770.133 Installation of Optical fibers and

Electrical Conductors.

(C) (B) With Other Circuits. Optical fibers shall be

permitted in the same cable, and conductive and

nonconductive optical fiber cables shall be

permitted in the same raceway, cable tray, box,

enclosure, or cable routing assembly, with

conductors of any of the following:

(1) Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling,

and power limited circuits in compliance with

Article 645 or Parts I and III of Article 725


322


broadband communications circuits

operating at 600 1000 volts or less, they shall

be permitted to be installed only where the

functions of the optical fibers and the

electrical conductors are associated.

Nonconductive optical fiber cables shall be

permitted to occupy the same cable tray or

raceway with conductors for electric light,

power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire

alarm, Type ITC, or medium-power network-

powered broadband communications

circuits, operating at 600 1000 volts or less.

Conductive optical fiber cables shall not be

permitted to occupy the same cable tray or

raceway with conductors for electric light,


alarm, Type ITC, or medium-power network-

powered broadband communications

circuits.

Optical fibers in composite optical fiber

cables containing only current-carrying

conductors for electric light, power, Class 1

circuits rated 600 1000 volts or less shall be

permitted to occupy the same cabinet, cable

tray, outlet box, panel, raceway, or other

termination enclosure with conductors for

electric light, power, or Class 1 circuits

operating at 600 1000 volts or less.

Nonconductive optical fiber cables shall not

be permitted to occupy the same cabinet,

(2) Power-limited fire alarm systems in

compliance with Parts I and III of Article 760

(3) Communications circuits in compliance with

Parts I and V of Article 800

(4) Community antenna television and radio

distribution systems in compliance with Parts I

and V of Article 820.

(5) Low-power network-powered broadband

communications circuits in compliance with Parts

I and V of Article 830.


323


outlet box, panel, or similar enclosure

housing the electrical terminations of an

electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-

limited fire alarm, or medium-power

network-powered broadband

communications circuit.

Exception No. 1: Occupancy of the same

cabinet, outlet box, panel, or similar

enclosure shall be permitted where

nonconductive optical fiber cable is

functionally associated with the electric light,


alarm, or medium-power network-powered

broadband communications circuit.

Exception No. 2: Occupancy of the same

cabinet, outlet box, panel, or similar

enclosure shall be permitted where

nonconductive optical fiber cables are

installed in factory or field-assembled control

centers.

Exception No. 3: In industrial establishments

only, where conditions of maintenance and


persons service the installation,

nonconductive optical fiber cables shall be

permitted with circuits exceeding 600 1000

volts.

Exception No. 4: In industrial establishments

only, where


324



ensure that only qualified persons service the

installation, optical fibers in composite

optical fiber cables containing current-

carrying conductors operating over 600 1000

volts shall be permitted to be installed.

Exception No. 5: Where all of the conductors

of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-

limited fire alarm, and medium-power

network-powered broadband

communications circuits are separated from

all of the optical fiber cables by a permanent

barrier or listed divider.

(B) With Communications Cables. Optical

fibers shall be permitted in the same cable,

and conductive and nonconductive optical

fiber cables shall be permitted in the same

raceway, cable tray, box, enclosure, raceway,

or cable routing assembly, with conductors

of any of the following:

(1) Communications circuits in compliance

with Parts I and IV V of Article 800


distribution systems in compliance with Parts

I and IV V of Article 820


325



communications circuits in compliance with

Parts I and IV V of Article 830

(C) With Other Circuits. Optical fibers shall

be permitted in the same cable, and

conductive and nonconductive optical fiber

cables shall be permitted in the same

raceway, cable tray, box, enclosure, or cable

routing assembly, raceway, with conductors

of any of the following:

(1) Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control,

signaling, and power limited circuits in

compliance with Article 645 or Parts I and III

of Article 725


compliance with Parts I and III of Article 760

Table 770.154(a) Applications of Listed

Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways, and

Cable Routing Assemblies in Buildings.

Revised.

770.179 Optical Fiber Cables.

(E) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. New section.

Field-Assembled Optical Fiber Cables. New

section.

770.179 Optical Fiber Cables. Add-

Temperature rating shall be marked on the jacket

of optical fiber cables that have a temperature

rating exceeding 600C (1400F).


326


770.180 Grounding Devices. New section.

Chapter 8 Communication Systems

ARCTICLE 800 Communication Circuits ARCTICLE 800 Communication Circuits

800.2 Definitions.

Electrical Circuit Protection System. New

definition.



(D) Installation and Use. New subsection.


(H) Temperature Limitation of Conductors. New

subsection.

800.12 Innerduct. New section.


Communications circuits and equipment

shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike

manner. Cables installed exposed on the

surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be




secured by hardware, including straps,

staples, cable ties, hangers, or similar fittings

designed and installed so as not to damage

the cable. The installation shall also conform

to 300.4(D) and 300.11. Nonmetallic cable


327




spaces used for environmental air (plenum)


release properties.

800.48 Unlisted Cables Entering Buildings. Add-




entrance cables in rigid metal conduit(RMC) or

intermediate metal conduit (IMC) to the point of

emergence.

800.49 Metallic Entrance Conduit

Grounding. New section.


Assemblies for Communications Wires and

Cables.

(A) Types of Raceways. Communications

wires and cables shall be permitted to be

installed in any raceway that complies with

either (A)(1) or (A)(2) and in cable routing

assemblies installed in compliance with

800.110(C).

(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. New section.

800.113 Installation of Communications

Wires, Cables and Raceways, and Cable

Routing Assemblies. Installation of


328


communications wires, cables, and

raceways, and cable routing assemblies shall

comply with 800.113(A) through (L).

Installation of raceways and cable routing

assemblies shall also comply with 800.110.

(A) Listing. Communications wires,

communication cables, and communication

raceways, and cable routing assemblies

installed in buildings shall be listed.

Exception: Communications cables that

comply with 800.48 shall not be required to

be listed.

(C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air

(Plenums).

The following wires, cables, and raceways

shall be permitted in other spaces used for

environmental air as described in 300.22(C):

(1) Type CMP cables

(2) Plenum communications raceways

(3) Type CMP cables installed in plenum

communications raceways

(4) Type CMP cables and plenum

communications raceways supported by

open metallic cable trays or cable tray

systems


329


(5) Types CMP, CMR, CMG, CM, and CMX

cables and communications wires installed in

raceways that are installed in compliance

with 300.22(C)


cables, and plenum communications

raceways, riser communications

raceways and general-purpose

communications raceways supported by

solid bottom metal cable trays with solid

metal covers in other spaces used for

environmental air (plenums) as described in

300.22(C)


cables installed in plenum communication

raceways, riser communication raceways,

and general-purpose communication

raceways supported by solid bottom metal

cable trays with solid metal covers in other


as described in 300.22(C)

(D) Risers — Cables and Raceways in

Vertical Runs. The following cables, and


be permitted in vertical runs penetrating one

or more floors and in vertical runs in a shaft:

(1) Types CMP and CMR cables


330


(2) Plenum and riser communications

raceways

(3) Plenum and riser cable routing

assemblies

(3) (4) Types CMP and CMR cables installed

in:

a. Plenum communications raceways

b. Riser communications raceways

c. Plenum and riser cable routing assembly

assemblies


(E) Risers — Cables and Raceways in Metal

Raceways.

The following cables, and raceways shall be

permitted in metal raceways in a riser having



cables




cables installed


331


in:



c. General-purpose communications

raceways

(F) Risers — Cables, and Raceways, and

Cable Routing Assemblies in Fireproof

Shafts.

The following cables, and raceways, and

cable routing assemblies shall be permitted

to be installed in fireproof riser shafts having



cables


communications Raceways

(3) Plenum, riser, and general-purpose cable

routing assemblies.

(3) Types CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM cables

installed in:




332



raceways

d. Plenum cable routing assemblies

d. e. Riser cable routing assembly assemblies

e. f. General-purpose cable routing assembly


Dwellings. The following Cables, and


be permitted in one- and two-family

dwellings:


(2) Type CMX cables less than 6 mm (0.25 in.)

in diameter




routing assemblies

(4) (5) Types CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM





333



raceways




assemblies

(H) Cable Trays. The following wires, cables,

and raceways shall be permitted to be

supported by cable trays:




(3) Communications wires and Types CMP,

CMR, CMG,

and CM cables installed in:




raceways


Arrays. The following wires, cables, and

raceways, cable routing assemblies shall be


334


permitted to be installed in distributing

frames and cross-connect arrays:


and communications wires


communications

Raceways


routing assemblies

(3) (4) Communications wires and Types

CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM cables installed in:




raceways




assemblies


wires, cables, and raceways, cable routing



335


in building locations other than the locations

covered in 800.113(B) through (I):


(2) A maximum of 3 m (10 ft) of exposed

Type CMX in nonconcealed spaces




routing assemblies






raceways



a. Plenum cable routing assemblies

b. Riser cable routing assembly assemblies

b. c. General-purpose cable routing assembly

assemblies


336



CMP, CMR, CMG, CM, and CMX cables

installed in a raceways recognized of a type

recognized in Chapter 3

(7) (8) Type CMUC under-carpet

communications wires and cables installed

under carpet

(K) Multifamily Dwellings. The following

cables, raceways, and wiring cable routing


in multifamily dwellings in locations other

than the locations covered in 800.113(B)

through (G):



in diameter in nonconcealed spaces




routing assemblies






337



raceways






assemblies


CMP, CMR, CMG, CM, and CMX cables

installed in a raceways recognized of a type


(7) (8) Type CMUC under-carpet

communications wires and cables installed

under carpet

(L) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. The

following cables, and raceways, and cable

routing assemblies shall be permitted to be

installed in one- and two-family dwellings in

locations other than the locations covered in

800.113(B) through (F):



in diameter


338





routing assemblies






raceways






assemblies

(6) (7) Communication wires and Types CMP,

CMR, CMG, CM, and CMX cables installed in

a raceway of a type recognized in Chapter 3

(7) Type CMUC under carpet

communications wires and

cables installed under carpet


339


(8) Hybrid power and communications cable

listed in accordance with 800.179(I)

800.133 Installation of Communications Wires,

Cables, and Equipment.

(A) Separation from Other Conductors.

(1) In Raceways, Cable Trays, Boxes, Cables, and

Enclosures.

(b) (a) Other Circuits. Communications cables shall

be permitted in the same raceway, cable tray, or

enclosure with cables of any of the following:

(1) Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling,

and

power-limited circuits in compliance with Parts I

and

III of Article 725


compliance with

Parts I and III of Article 760

(3) Nonconductive and conductive optical

fiber cables in compliance with Parts I and

V or Article 770.


distribution systems in compliance with

Parts I and V of Article 820.


communications circuits in compliance

with Parts I and V of Article 830.

800.154 Applications of Listed

Communications Wires,


340


Cables, and Raceways, Listed Cable Routing

Assembly. Permitted and nonpermitted

applications of listed communications wires,

cables, and raceways, and listed cable

routing assemblies shall be in accordance

with one of the following:

(1) Listed communications wires and

cables as indicated in Table

800.154(a).

(2) Listed communication raceways as

indicated in Table 800.154(b).

(3) Listed cable routing assemblies as

indicated in Table 800.154(c).

as indicated in Table 800.154(a). The

permitted applications shall be subject to the

installation requirements of 800.110 and

800.113. The substitutions for

communications cables listed in Table

800.154(b) (d) and illustrated in Figure

800.154 shall be permitted.

Table 800.154(a) Applications of Listed

Communication Wires and Cables in

Buildings. Revised.

Table 800.154(b) Applications of Listed

Communication Raceways in Buildings. New

table.


341


Table 800.154(c) Applications of Listed

Cable Routing Assemblies in Buildings. New

table.

800.170 Equipment.

(C) Plenum Grade Cable Ties. New section.

800.179 Communications Wires and Cables.

(G) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical

Circuit Protective System. New section and

subsections.

800.179 Communications Wires and Cables. Add-

The temperature rating shall be marked on the

jacket of communications cables that have a

temperature rating exceeding 600C (1400F).


800.182 Communications Raceways and

Cable Routing

Assemblies. Communications raceways and

cable routing assemblies shall be listed in

accordance with 800.182(A) through (C).

(A) Plenum Communications Raceways and

Plenum Cable Routing Assemblies. Plenum

communications Raceways and plenum cable

routing assemblies shall be listed as plenum

optical fiber raceways shall be permitted for

use in ducts, plenums, and other spaces used

for environmental air and shall also be listed

as having adequate fire-resistant and low

smoke-producing characteristics.

800.182 Communications Raceways and Cable

Routing

Assemblies. Cable routing assemblies and

communications raceways Communications

raceways and cable routing assemblies shall be

listed in accordance with 800.182(A) through (C)

Cable routing assemblies shall be marked in

accordance with Table 800.182(a).

Communications raceways shall be marked in

accordance with Table 800.182(b).

(A) Plenum Cable Routing Assemblies and

Plenum Communications Raceways

Communications Raceways and Plenum Cable

Routing Assemblies. Plenum communications

raceways and Plenum cable routing assemblies


342


(B) Riser Communications Raceways and

Riser Cable Routing Assemblies. Riser

communications raceways and riser cable

routing assemblies shall be listed as having

adequate fire-resistant characteristics

capable of preventing the carrying of fire

from floor to floor.

(C) General-Purpose Communications

Raceways and General-Purpose Cable

Routing Assemblies. General-purpose

communications raceways and general-

purpose cable routing assemblies shall be

listed as being resistant to the spread of fire.

and plenum communications raceways shall be

listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low

smoke-producing characteristics.

(B) Riser Communications Raceways and Riser

Cable Routing Assemblies and Riser

Communications Raceways. Riser cable Riser

communications raceways and riser cable routing

assemblies and riser communications raceways

shall be listed as having adequate fire-resistant

characteristics capable of preventing the carrying

of fire from floor to floor.

(C) General-Purpose Communications Raceways

and General-Purpose Cable Routing Assemblies

and General-Purpose Communications

Raceways. General-purpose cable routing

assemblies communications raceways and

general-purpose communications raceways cable

routing assemblies shall be listed as being

resistant to the spread of fire.

ARTICLE 810

Radio and Television Equipment

810.6 Antenna Lead-In Protectors. New

section.



343


810.15 Grounding. Masts and metal structures

supporting antennas shall be grounded in

accordance with 810.21, unless the antenna and

its related supporting mast or structure are within

a zone of protection defined by a 46 m (150 ft)

radius rolling sphere.

ARTICLE 820 Community Antenna Television

and Radio Distribution Systems


(B) Wiring is Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or

Vapor Removal. New section inserted.

(C) Equipment in Other Space Used for

Environmental Air. New section.

(H) Cable Routing Assemblies. The

definition in Article 100, 770.2, the

applications in Table 800.154©, 770.154 ,

and installation requirements rules in

800.110 770.113 shall apply to Article 820

and 800.113.


Community television and radio distribution

systems shall be installed in a neat and

workmanlike manner. Coaxial cables

installed exposed on the surface of ceiling

and sidewalls shall be supported by the

building structure in such a manner that the

cables will not be damaged by normal


344


building use. Such cables shall be secured by

hardware including straps, staples, cable ties,



installation shall also conform to 300.4(D)

and 300.11. Nonmetallic cable ties and other

nonmetallic cable accessories used to secure

and support cables in other spaces used for

environmental air (plenum) shall be listed as

having low smoke and heat release

properties.

820.47 Underground Coaxial Cables

Entering Buildings.

(A) Underground Systems with Electric

Light, and Power, Class 1, or Non-Power-

Limited Fire Alarm Circuits

Conductors. Underground coaxial cables in a

duct, pedestal, handhole enclosure, or

manhole that contains electric light, or

power, Class 1 or non-power-limited fire

alarm circuit conductors or Class 1 circuits

shall be in a section permanently separated

from such conductors by means of a suitable

barrier.

820.48 Unlisted Cables Entering Buildings. Add-





345


entrance cables in rigid metal conduit (RMC) or

intermediate metal conduit (IMC) to the point of

emergence.



820.100 Cable Bonding and Grounding. The

shield of the coaxial cable shall be bonded or

grounded as specified in 820.100(A) through

(D).

Exception: For communications systems

using coaxial

cable confined within the premises and

isolated from outside cable plant, the shield

shall be permitted to be grounded by a

connection to an equipment grounding

conductor as described in 250.118.

Connecting to an equipment grounding

conductor through a grounded receptacle

using a dedicated bonding jumper grounding

conductor and a permanently connected

listed device shall be permitted. Use of a cord

and plug for the connection to an equipment

grounding conductor shall not be permitted.

(A) Bonding Conductor or Grounding

Electrode Conductor.

(4) Length. The bonding conductor or

grounding electrode conductor shall be as


346


short as practicable. In one- and two-family

dwellings, the bonding conductor or

grounding electrode conductor shall be as

short as practicable, not to exceed 6.0 m (20

ft) in length.

(B) Electrode. The bonding conductor or


connected in accordance with 820.100(B)(1),

(B)(2), or (B)(3).

(2) In Buildings or Structures with

Grounding Means.

(3) The power service accessible means

external to enclosures as covered in 250.94,

Exception

(3) In Buildings or Structures Without an

Intersystem

Bonding Termination or Grounding Means.

If the building or structure served has no

intersystem bonding termination or

grounding means, as described in

820.100(B)(2), the grounding electrode

conductor shall be connected to either of the

following:

(1) To any one of the individual grounding

electrodes described in 250.52(A)(1), (A)(2),

(A)(3), or (A)(4)


347


(2) If the building or structure served has no

intersystem bonding termination or

grounding means, as described in

820.100(B)(2) or (B)(3)(1), to any one of the

individual grounding electrodes described in

250.52(A)(5), (A)(7) and (A)(8). Steam or hot

water pipes or air terminal conductors

(lightning-rod conductors) shall not be

employed for bonding conductors or

grounding electrode conductors.

820.106 Grounding and Bonding at Mobile

Homes.

(A) Grounding. Grounding shall comply with

820.106(A)(1) and (A)(2).

(1) Where there is no mobile home service

equipment located within 9.0 m (30 ft) of the

exterior wall of the mobile home it serves,

the coaxial cable shield ground, or surge

arrester grounding arrestor ground, shall be

connected to a grounding electrode

conductor or grounding electrode in

accordance with 820.100(B)(3).

(2) Where there is no mobile home

disconnecting means grounded in

accordance with 250.32 and located within

9.0 m (30 ft) of the exterior wall of the

mobile home it serves, the coaxial cable

shield ground, or surge arrester grounding


348


terminal ground, shall be connected to a

grounding electrode in accordance with

820.100(B)(3).


Assemblies for Coaxial Cables.

(A) Types of Raceways. Coaxial cables shall

be permitted to be installed in any raceway

that complies with either (A)(1) or (A)(2) and

in cable routing assemblies installed in

compliance with 820.110(C).

(2) Communication Other Permitted

Raceways. Coaxial cables shall be permitted

to be installed in listed plenum

communications raceway, listed riser

communications raceways, or and listed

general purpose communications raceways

selected in accordance with the provisions of

800.110, 800.113, and 820.113, and installed

in accordance with 362.24 through 362.56,

where the requirements applicable to

electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) apply.

(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. New section

and subsections.

820.110 Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies

for Coaxial Cables.

(3) Innerduct for Coaxial Cables. New

subsections.

820.113 Installation of Coaxial Cables.

(C) Other Spaces Used For Environmental

Air (Plenums).


349


The following cables shall be permitted in

other spaces used for environmental air as

described in 300.22(C):

(1) Type CATVP cable

(2) Type CATVP cable installed in plenum


(3) Type CATVP cable supported by open

metallic cable trays or cable tray systems

(4) Types CATVP, CATVR, CATV, and CATVX

cables installed in raceways that are installed

in compliance with 300.22(C)


cables supported by solid bottom metal

cable trays with solid metal covers in other


as described in 300.22(C) Informational

Note: For information on fire protection of

wiring installed in other spaces used for

environmental air see 4.3.11.2, 4.3.11.4, and

4.3.11.5 of NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the

Installation of Air-Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems.

(6) Types CATVP, CATVP, CATV, and CATVX

cables installed in plenum communication

raceways, riser communication raceways, or

general-purpose communication raceways

supported by solid bottom metal cable trays


350


with solid metal covers in other spaces used

for environmental air (plenums) as described

in 300.22(C)

(D) Risers — Cables in Vertical Runs. The

following cables shall be permitted in vertical

runs penetrating one or more floors and in

vertical runs in a shaft:

(1) Types CATVP and CATVR cables

(2) Types CATVP and CATVR cables installed

in:



b. c. Riser communications raceways

c. d. Riser cable routing assembly assemblies

(E) Risers — Cables in Metal Raceways. The

following cables shall be permitted in metal

raceways in a riser having firestops at each

floor:


cables





351




raceways

(F) Risers — Cables in Fireproof Shafts. The

following cables shall be permitted to be

installed in fireproof riser shafts with



cables

(2) Types CATVP, CATVR, and CATV cables

installed in:




c. General-purpose communications raceway

d. Riser cable routing assembly assemblies


raceways

e. (f) General-purpose cable routing

assembly assemblies


352



Dwellings. The following cables shall be



(2) Type CATVX cable less than 10 mm (0.375

in.) in diameter


installed in:




c. General-purpose communications raceway



raceways


assemblies

(H) Cable Trays. The following cables shall be

permitted

to be supported by cable trays:



353



installed in:




raceways


Arrays. The following cables shall be

permitted to be installed in distributing

frames and cross-connect arrays:



installed in:





c. e. General-purpose communications

raceways

d. Riser cable routing assembly


354



assemblies


cables and cable routing assemblies shall be

permitted to be installed in building

locations other than the locations covered in

820.113(B) through (I):


(2) A maximum of 3 m (10 ft) of exposed

Type CATVX

cable in nonconcealed spaces


installed in:






raceways



assemblies


355


(4) Types CATVP, CATVR, CATV, and Type

CATVX cables installed in a raceway of a type


(K) One- and Two-Family and Multifamily

Dwellings.

The following cables and cable routing


in one- and two-family and multifamily

dwellings in locations other than those

locations covered in 820.113(B) through (I):


(2) Type CATVX cable less than 10 mm (0.375

in.) in

diameter


installed in:






raceways


356




assemblies

(4) Types CATVP, CATVR, CATV, and Type

CATVX cables installed in a raceway of a type


820.179 Coaxial Cables. Add-

Coaxial cables shall have a temperature rating of

not less than 600C (1400F). The temperature

rating shall be marked on the jacket of coaxial

cables that have a temperature rating exceeding

600C (1400F).


ARTICLE 830 Network-Powered Broadband

Communication Systems

830.3 Other Articles

(B) Wiring in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or

Vapor Removal. New subsection inserted.

(F) Protection against Physical Damage.

New subsection inserted.


Network-powered broadband

communications circuits and equipment shall


357


be installed in a neat and workmanlike

manner. Cables installed exposed on the

surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be




secured by hardware including straps,

staples, cable ties, hangers, or similar fittings

designed and installed so as not to damage

the cable. The installation shall also conform

to 300.4(D) and 300.11. Nonmetallic cable





release properties.




Homes.


830.106(A)(1) or (A)(2).




the network-powered broadband

communications cable shield, network-

powered broadband communications cable

metallic members not used for


358


communications or powering, network

interface unit, and primary protector ground

grounding terminal shall be installed

connected to a grounding electrode

conductor or grounding electrode in





sight from, and not more than 9.0 m (30 ft)

of, the exterior wall of the mobile home it

serves, the network-powered broadband

communications cable shield, network-

powered broadband communication cable

metallic members not used for

communication or powering, network

interface unit, and primary protector

grounding terminal ground shall be installed

connected to a grounding electrode in



Assemblies for for Low- and Medium-Power

Network-Powered Broadband

Communications Cables.

(A) Types of Raceways. New section

inserted.

(1) Raceways Recognized in Chapter 3.

Renumbered.

830.110 Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies

for Network-Powered Broadband

Communications Cables.

(A)(3) Innerduct for Low-Power Network-

Powered Broadband Communications Cables.

New section.


359


(2) Communications Raceways. New section.

(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. New section

and subsections.

830.113 Installation of Network-Powered

Broadband Communication Cables.

(C) Other Spaces Used Fir Environmental Air

(Plenums)

(6) Types BLP, BMR, BLR, BM, BL, and BLX

cables installed in plenum communications

raceways, riser communication =s raceways,

or general-purpose communications

raceways supported by solid bottom metal

cables trays with solid mental covers in other

spaces used for environmental (plenums) as

described in 300.22(C)

(D) Risers- Cables in Vertical Runs.

(1) Types BLP, BMR, and BLR cables

(2) Types BLP and BLR cables installed in:




c. d. Riser cable routing assembly assemblies


360


(E) Risers — Cables in Metal Raceways. The

following cables shall be permitted in a metal

raceway in a riser with firestops at each

floor:


cables

(2) Types BLP, BLR, and BL cables installed in:




raceways

(F) Risers — Cables in Fireproof Shafts. The

following cables shall be permitted to be

installed in fireproof riser shafts with



cables







361



raceways



assemblies


Dwellings. The following cables shall be


(1) Types BLP, BMR, BLR, BM, and BL cables

and Types BL and BLX cables less than 10 mm

(0.375 in.) in diameter







raceways



assemblies


362


(H) Other Building Locations. The following

cables and raceways shall be permitted to be

installed in building locations other than

those covered in 830.113(B) through (G):

(1) Types BLP, BMR, BLR, BM, and BL cables


cables

installed in a raceway

(3) Types BLP, BLR, and BL cables






raceways



assemblies

(4) Types BLX and BL cables less than 10 mm

(0.375 in.) in diameter in one- and two-

family dwellings


363


(5) Types BMU and BLU cables entering the

building from outside and run in rigid metal

conduit (RMC) or intermediate metal conduit

(IMC) where the conduit is connected by a

bonding conductor or grounding electrode

conductor in accordance with 830.100(B)

(6) A maximum length of 15 m (50 ft), within

the building, of Type BLX cable entering the

building from outside and terminating at an

NIU or a primary protection location

830 180 Grounding Devices. New section.

ARTICLE 840 Premises-Powered Broadband

Communications Systems

ARTICLE 840 Premises-Powered Broadband

Communications Systems


(B) Cables in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or

Vapor Removal. New section.

(D) Installation and Use. New section.

840.45 Overhead (aerial) Communications Wires

and Cables. New section.

840.46 Overhead (aerial) Coaxial Cables. New

section.


364


840.48 Unlisted Wires and Cables Entering

Buildings.

(A) Optical Fiber Cables. New subsection.

(B) Communications Wires and Cables. New

subsection.

(C) Coaxial Cables. New subsection.



804.93 Grounding or Interruption. Revised.


Homes.


(1) and (2).




the non-current-carrying metallic members

of optical fiber cables shall be connected to a

grounding electrode in accordance with

770.106(A)(1). The ONT, if required to be

grounded, shall be connected to a grounding

electrode in accordance with 800.106(A)(1)

840.100. Premises communications circuits


365


and premises CATV circuits shall be

grounded in accordance with 820.106(A)(1)

840.93, unless the ONT is listed to provide

the grounding path for the shield of the

coaxial cable. The grounding electrode shall

be bonded in accordance with 770.106(B).




9.0 m (30 ft) of the exterior wall of the

mobile home it serves, the non-current-

carrying metallic members of optical fiber

cables shall be connected to a grounding

electrode in accordance with 700.106(A)(2).

The ONT, if required to be grounded, shall be

connected to a grounding electrode in

accordance with 820.106(A)(2), unless the

ONT is listed to provide the grounding path

for the shield of the coaxial cable. The

grounding electrode shall be bonded in

accordance with 770.106(B) 800.100(B)(3).

Premises communications circuits and

premises CATV circuits shall be grounded in


Part VI. Premises Powering of Communications

Equipment over Communications Cables. New

part and section.

840.170 Equipment and Cables.


366


(D) Cable Routing Assemblies and

Communications Raceways. New section.

(E) Premises Communications Wires and Cables.

New section.


Chapter 9 Tables

Notes to Tables

(6) For combinations of conductors of

different sizes, use actual dimensions or

Table 5 and Table 5A for dimensions of

conductors and Table 4 for the applicable

conduit or tubing dimensions.

(7) When calculating the maximum number

of conductors or cables permitted in a

conduit or tubing, all of the same size (total

cross-sectional area including insulation), the

next higher whole number shall be used to

determine the maximum number of

conductors permitted when the calculation

results in a decimal greater than or equal to

of 0.8 or larger. When calculating the size for

conduit or tubing permitted for a single

conductor, one conductor shall be permitted

when the calculation results in a decimal

greater than or equal to 0.8.


367


(9) A multiconductor cable, optical fiber

cable, or flexible cord of two or more

conductors shall be treated as a single

conductor for calculating percentage conduit

fill area. For cables that have elliptical cross

sections, the cross-sectional area calculation

shall be based on using the major diameter

of the ellipse as a circle diameter.

(10) The values for approximate conductor

diameter and area shown in Table 5 are

based on worst-case scenario and indicate

round concentric-lay-stranded conductors.

Solid and round concentric-lay-stranded

conductor values are grouped together for

the purpose of Table 5. Round compact-

strand conductor values of the conductor

diameter and area are known, they shall be


Article 362- Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing

(ENT). Revised.

Table 5 Dimensions of Insulated Conductors

and Fixture Wire. Revised.

Table C-4 Maximum Number of Conductors

or Fixture Wires in Intermediate Metal

Conduit. Revised.


368



or Fixture Wires in Liquidtight Flexible

Nonmetallic Conduit. Revised.


or Fixture Wires in Liquidtight Flexible

Metal Conduit. Revised.


or Fixture Wires in Rigid Metal Conduit.

Revised.


or Fixture Wires in Rigid PVC Conduit.

Revised.

Table C-10 Maximum Number of

Conductors or Fixture Wires in Rigid PVC

Conduit. Revised.

Table C-11 Maximum Number of

Conductors or Fixture Wires in Type A, Rigid

OVC Conduit. Rigid.

Informative Annex J ADA Standards for

Accessible Design. New Annex.

chapter 1 general chapter 1 general article 90

Documents